ICOM orporated 339300 HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver User Manual manual draft ALL

ICOM Incorporated HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver manual draft ALL

User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	2000118
Application ID	4JFTunLyjyetUhmuVg7j7Q==
Document Description	User Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	318.77kB (3984687 bits)
Date Submitted	2013-06-25 00:00:00
Date Available	2013-10-01 00:00:00
Creation Date	2013-05-23 17:02:41
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2013-06-12 16:58:12
Document Title	manual_draft_ALL.pdf
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Document Author:	masaakit

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER
i7100
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE
C E L L U L A R R A D I OT E L E P H O N E S E RV I C E S I G N A L S I S
PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.
FOREWORD
Thank you for purchasing this ﬁne Icom product. The IC-7100
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE TRANSCEIVER is designed and build with
Icom’s superior technology and craftsmanship combining traditional analog technologies with the new digital technology,
Digital Smart Technologies for Amateur Radio (D-STAR), for
a balanced package. With proper care, this product should
provide you with years of trouble-free operation.
We thank you for making your IC-7100 your radio of choice,
and hope you agree with Icom’s philosophy of “technology
ﬁrst.” Many hours or research and development went into the
design of your IC-7100.
FEATURES
❍ IF DSP features
❍ All mode capability covering 160–2 m and
70 cm (depending on version)
❍ Compact with separated front panel
❍ ±0.5 ppm of high frequency stability
❍ Baudot RTTY demodulator
❍ Selectable SSB transmission passband
width (For both higher and lower pass
frequency)
❍ Standard voice synthesizer/voice recorder
❍ SD card slot ready for several memory
storage
❍ Vo i c e r e c o r d e r t o r e c o r d s y o u r
communication
❍ DV mode (Digital voice + Low-speed data
communication) operation-ready
– Text message and call sign exchange
– Transmit position data
❍ D R ( D - S TA R R e p e a t e r ) m o d e a n d
repeater list allow you to easily operate
using a D-STAR repeater
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered
trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the
United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, France,
Spain, Russia and/or other countries.
EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS
WORD
DEFINITION
Personal death, serious injury or an
R DANGER!
explosion may occur.
Personal injury, ﬁre hazard or electric
R WARNING!
shock may occur.
CAUTION
Equipment damage may occur.
Recommended for optimum use. No
NOTE
risk of personal injury, ﬁre or electric
shock.
IMPORTANT
READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS carefully and completely
before using the transceiver.
SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL— This
instruction manual contains important operating instructions
for the IC-7100.
FCC INFORMATION
• FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this
device, not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could
void your authority to operate this device under FCC
regulations.
PRECAUTIONS
R DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE! NEVER touch an
antenna or internal antenna connector during transmission.
This may result in an electrical shock or burn.
R WARNING RF EXPOSURE! This device emits
Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Extreme caution should
be observed when operating this device. If you have
any questions regarding RF exposure and safety standards please refer to the Federal Communications
Commission Ofﬁce of Engineering and Technology’s
report on Evaluating Compliance with FCC Guidelines
for Human Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields
(OET Bulletin 65).
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver while
driving a vehicle. Safe driving requires your full attention—
anything less may result in an accident.
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver with
an earphone, headphones or other audio accessories
at high volume levels. Hearing experts advise against
continuous high volume operation. If you experience
a ringing in your ears, reduce the volume level or discontinue use.
R WARNING! NEVER apply AC power to the
[DC13.8V] connector on the transceiver rear panel. This
could cause a ﬁre or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC to the
[DC13.8V] connector on the transceiver rear panel or use
reverse polarity. This could cause a ﬁre or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER cut the DC power cable between the DC plug and fuse holder. If an incorrect connection is made after cutting, the transceiver might be damaged.
R WARNING! NEVER let metal, wire or other objects
touch any internal part or connectors on the rear panel of the
transceiver. This may result in an electric shock or this could
cause a ﬁre or damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! NEVER operate or touch the transceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric
shock or may damage the transceiver.
R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver power
OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an abnormal
odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom dealer or distributor for advice.
DO NOT operate the transceiver near unshielded
electrical blasting caps or in an explosive atmosphere.
DO NOT use harsh solvents such as benzine or alcohol to clean the transceiver, as they will damage
the transceiver’s surfaces. If the transceiver becomes
dusty or dirty, wipe it clean with a soft, dry cloth.
DO NOT use or place the transceiver in areas with temperatures below –10°C (+14°F) or above +60°C (+140°F).
Be aware that temperatures on a vehicle’s dashboard can
exceed +80°C (+176°F), resulting in permanent damage to
the transceiver if left there for extended periods.
DO NOT place the transceiver in excessively dusty envi-
ronments or in direct sunlight.
DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or putting anything on top of the transceiver. This will obstruct heat dissipation.
Place the transceiver in a secure place to avoid inadvertent
use by children.
During mobile operation, NEVER place the transceiver
where air bag deployment may be obstructed.
During mobile operation, DO NOT place the transceiver
where hot or cold air blows directly onto it.
During mobile operation, DO NOT operate the transceiver
without running the vehicle’s engine. When the transceiver’s
power is ON and your vehicle’s engine is OFF, the vehicle’s
battery will soon become exhausted.
Make sure the transceiver power is OFF before starting the
vehicle engine. This will avoid possible damage to the transceiver by ignition voltage spikes.
10
11
During maritime mobile operation, keep the transceiver and
microphone as far away as possible from the magnetic navigation compass to prevent erroneous indications.
12
13
BE CAREFUL! The rear panel will become hot when operating the transceiver continuously for long periods of time.
14
BE CAREFUL! If a linear ampliﬁer is connected, set the
15
transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear ampliﬁer’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear ampliﬁer will
be damaged.
16
Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional). Other
manufacturer’s microphones have different pin assignments,
and connection to the IC-7100 may damage the transceiver.
17
18
CAUTION: NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow
19
or any liquids.
CAUTION: NEVER change the internal settings of
20
the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver performance and/or damage to the transceiver.
21
ii
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are supplied with the transceiver.
q Hand microphone ............................................... 1
w Control cable ....................................................... 1
e Ferrite bead.......................................................... 1
r 3.5 (d) mm plug .................................................... 1
t ACC cable ............................................................ 1
y DC power cable* (OPC-1457) ............................ 1
or (OPC-1457R) ......................... 1
u Spare fuse (ATC 5 A) ......................................... 1
i USB cable ............................................................ 1
o CD ........................................................................ 1
!0 Spare fuse (ATC 30 A) ....................................... 2
* Depending on the version.
* Not supplied, or the shape is different, depending on the transceiver version.
iii
!0
Previous view
Section 1
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller)...........................................................1-2
Display.....................................................................................1-8
Display.....................................................................................1-9
Display.....................................................................................1-10
Display.....................................................................................1-11
M-1 (M-1 menu) Display ..........................................................1-11
M-2 (M-2 menu) Display ..........................................................1-11
M-3 (M-3 menu) Display ..........................................................1-11
D-1 (D-1 menu) Display ...........................................................1-11
D-2 (D-2 menu) Display ...........................................................1-11
1-1
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller)
i7100
PWR
AF
RF/SQL
TX / RX
CLR
M-CH
PBT
BANK
RIT
RIT
MENU
NB
NR
NOTCH
SET
AUTO TUNE RX➔CS
TUNER/CALL
MIC/RF PWR
SPEED/PITCH
P.AMP ATT
DR
QUICK
XFC
SPEECH
MPAD
• When used as an RF gain/squelch control
q POWER SWITCH/AF VOLUME [PWR]/[AF]
(p. 44)
➥ Push to turn ON the transceiver power.
Noise squelch (FM/DV modes)
Recommended level
Squelch is
open.
• First, conﬁrm the DC power source is turned ON.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to turn OFF the power.
➥ Rotate to adjust audio output level.
Maximum
RF gain
RF gain
adjustable
range
Increases
S-meter
squelch
• When used as an RF gain control
(Squelch is ﬁxed open; SSB, CW and RTTY only)
Decreases
w RF GAIN CONTROL/ SQUELCH CONTROL
[RF/SQL] (p. 44)
Rotate to adjust the RF gain and squelch threshold
level.
The squelch removes noise output to the speaker
when no signal is received. (closed condition)
Maximum
RF gain
Adjustable
range
Minimum RF gain
While rotating the RF gain control, a faint noise may
be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does
not indicate an equipment malfunction.
• When used as a squelch control
(RF gain is ﬁxed at maximum.)
Noise squelch (FM/DV modes)
• The squelch is particularly effective for AM and FM, but
also works in other modes.
• The 12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for the most
effective use of the [RF/SQL] control.
• [RF/SQL] operates as only an RF gain control in SSB,
CW and RTTY (Squelch is ﬁxed open), or a squelch control in AM, FM and DV (RF gain is ﬁxed at maximum sensitivity), when “Auto” is selected as the “RF/SQL Control”
item in the “Function” Set mode. (p. 162)
SET > Function > RF/SQL Control
Noise squelch
threshold
(FM mode)
Squelch is
open.
Shallow
1-2
S-meter squelch
threshold
S-meter
squelch
Deep
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
i7100
PWR
AF
RF/SQL
TX / RX
CLR
M-CH
PBT
BANK
RIT
RIT
MENU
NB
NR
NOTCH
SET
AUTO TUNE RX➔CS
TUNER/CALL
MIC/RF PWR
SPEED/PITCH
P.AMP ATT
DR
QUICK
XFC
SPEECH
MPAD
e TX/RX LED
➥ Lights green when the squelch opens, or a signal
is received.
➥ Lights red during transmit.
❍ When the PBT LED rights green
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
➥ Rotate to adjust the receiver’s IF ﬁlter passband width using the DSP circuit.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to reset the PBT settings.
r MEMORY BANK CONTROL [BANK]
❍ When the both PBT and RIT LEDs are OFF
Rotate to select a Memory bank.
• The PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB/
CW/RTTY modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode. In
this time, the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps in
the SSB/CW/RTTY modes, and 100 Hz in the AM
mode.
• The PBT controls function as an IF shift control.
❍ When the PBT LED (y) rights green
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
Rotate to adjust the receiver’s IF ﬁlter passband
width using the DSP circuit.
✔ What is the PBT control?
❍ When the RIT LED (u) rights orange
Disable this control.
The PBT function electronically modiﬁes the IF passband width to reject interference. This transceiver uses
the DSP circuit for the PBT function.
t M-CH CONTROL/CLEAR KEY [M-CH]/[CLR]
Push to select the action of the [M-CH/BANK] controls as the Memory/Bank selection, PBT control or
RIT control.
❍ When the both RIT and PBT LEDs are OFF
Rotate to select a Memory channel.
y PBT LED
Lights green when the [M-CH/BANK]
as the PBT control.
• Push the [M-CH]
❍ When the RIT LED rights orange
➥ Rotate to adjust the RIT frequency shift.
controls act
switch to select as the PBT control.
u RIT LED
➥ Lights orange when the RIT function turns ON.
➥ Lights orange when the [M-CH/BANK] controls
act as the RIT control.
• The frequency shift range is ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz
steps. The control tunes in 1 Hz steps when the
operating frequency readout is set to the 1 Hz step
readout.
• Push the [M-CH]
switch to select as the RIT control.
• The RIT control is the inner control. The outer control
is disabled.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to clear the RIT shift
frequency.
✔ What is the RIT function?
i RIT KEY RIT (p. 69)
➥ Push to turn the RIT function ON or OFF.
The RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) shifts the receive frequency without shifting the transmit frequency.
This is useful for ﬁne tuning stations calling you off-frequency or when you prefer to listen to slightly differentsounding voice characteristics, and so on.
• Use the [M-CH]
control to vary the RIT frequency.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to add the shift frequency
of the RIT function to or subtract it from the displayed frequency.
1-3
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
i7100
PWR
AF
RF/SQL
TX / RX
CLR
M-CH
PBT
BANK
RIT
RIT
MENU
NB
NR
NOTCH
SET
AUTO TUNE RX➔CS
TUNER/CALL
MIC/RF PWR
SPEED/PITCH
P.AMP ATT
DR
QUICK
XFC
!0
!2 NOISE BLANKER KEY NB (p. 76)
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
➥ Push to turn the noise blanker ON or OFF.
The noise blanker reduces pulse-type noise such
as that generated by vehicle ignition systems. The
noise blanker is not effective for non-pulse-type
noise.
• “NB” appears when the noise blanker is ON.
• If the tuner cannot tune the antenna within 20 seconds, the tuning circuit is automatically bypassed.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to display the “NB” screen.
Push to return to the previous screen.
❍ CALL KEY Operation (p. 139)
(Frequency band: 144/430 MHz)
Push to select the call channel.
!3 KEY SPEED/CW PITCH ADJUSTMENT KEY
SPEED/PITCH (p. 19)
Push to open the Key speed/CW pitch adjustment
display.
!0 MENU SWITCH MENU (p. 19)
Push to change the set of functions assigned to
touch keys.
• Toggles the function display menu between M-1 (M-1
menu), M-2 (M-2 menu), M-3 (M-3 menu), D-1 (D-1
menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu).
• Rotate [M-CH] to adjust the keying speed of the internal electronic CW keyer to between 6 wpm (minimum)
and 48 wpm (maximum).
• Rotate [BANK]
to shift the received CW audio pitch
and the CW sidetone pitch without changing the operating frequency.
• The CW pitch can be adjusted from 300 to 900 Hz in approximately 5 Hz steps.
• Push again to close the window.
!1 MIC GAIN/RF POWER ADJUSTMENT KEY
MIC/RF PWR (p. 19)
Push to open the MIC gain/RF power adjustment
display.
to adjust the MIC gain.
to adjust the RF power.
Frequency band
HF/50 MHz
144 MHz
430 MHz
MPAD
!1 !2 !3 !4
o ANTENNA TUNER/CALL KEY TUNER/CALL
❍ ANTENNA TUNER KEY Operation (p. 139)
(Frequency band: HF/50 MHz)
➥ Push to turn the optional antenna tuner ON or
OFF (bypass).
➥ Hold down for 1 second to manually start the
antenna tuner.
• Rotate [M-CH]
• Rotate [BANK]
SPEECH
!4 NOISE REDUCTION KEY NR (p. 77)
➥ Push to turn DSP noise reduction ON or OFF.
• “NR” appears when noise reduction is ON.
RF output power range
2 to 100 W
(AM: 1 to 30 W)
2 to 100 W
2 to 75 W
➥ Hold down for 1 second to display the “NR” screen.
Push to return to the previous screen.
• Rotate the Dial to adjust the DSP noise reduction
level. Set for maximum readability.
• Push again to close the window.
1-4
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
i7100
PWR
AF
RF/SQL
TX / RX
CLR
M-CH
PBT
BANK
RIT
RIT
MENU
NB
NR
NOTCH
SET
AUTO TUNE RX➔CS
TUNER/CALL
MIC/RF PWR
SPEED/PITCH
P.AMP ATT
DR
QUICK
XFC
SPEECH
MPAD
!5 !6
!5 PREAMP•ATTENUATOR KEY P.AMP ATT
❍ PREAMP KEY Operation (p. 71)
(Frequency band: HF/50 MHz)
Push to select one of two receive RF preampliﬁers, or to bypass them.
!6 NOTCH SWITCH NOTCH (p. 77)
(Mode = Auto notch: SSB/AM/FM
Manual notch: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
➥ In the SSB and AM modes, push to toggle the
notch function between auto, manual and OFF.
• “P. AMP1” is a wide dynamic range preampliﬁer. It is
most effective for the 1.8 to 21 MHz bands.
• “P. AMP2” is a high-gain preampliﬁer. It is most effective for the 24 to 50 MHz bands.
• No indicator appears when the preampliﬁers are not
selected.
• Either the Auto or Manual notch function can be turned
OFF in the “[NOTCH] Switch (SSB)/(AM)” items of the
“Function” Set mode. (p. 36)
SET > Function > [NOTCH] Switch (SSB)
SET > Function > [NOTCH] Switch (AM)
➥ In the FM mode, push to turn the Auto Notch function ON or OFF.
✔ What is the preampliﬁer?
The preampliﬁer ampliﬁes signals in the front end
to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P.
AMP1” or “P. AMP2” when receiving weak signals.
➥ In the CW or RTTY mode, push to turn the Manual
Notch function ON or OFF.
• “MN” appears when the Manual Notch function is
ON.
• “AN” appears when the Auto Notch function is ON.
• No indicator appears when the notch ﬁlter is OFF.
(Frequency band: 144/430 MHz)
Push to turn the preampliﬁer ON or OFF.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to display the “NOTCH”
screen.
Push to return to the previous screen.
• “P.AMP” appears when the preampliﬁer is ON.
❍ ATTENUATOR KEY Operation (p. 71)
➥ Hold down for 1 second to turn ON the attenuator.
• Rotate the Dial to adjust the notch frequency to reject
an interfering signal while the manual function is ON.
• Notch ﬁlter center frequency:
SSB/RTTY: –1040 Hz to +4040 Hz
CW:
CW pitch frequency –2540 Hz to
CW pitch frequency +2540 Hz
AM:
–5060 Hz to +5100 Hz
• “ATT” appears when the attenuator is ON.
➥ Push to turn OFF the attenuator.
• “ATT” disappears.
✔ What is the attenuator?
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being distorted when very strong signals are near it,
or when very strong electromagnetic ﬁelds, such
as from a broadcasting station, are near your location.
✔ What is the notch ﬁlter?
The notch ﬁlter is a narrow ﬁlter that eliminates unwanted CW or AM carrier tones, while preserving
the desired voice signal. The DSP circuit automatically adjusts the notch frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted tones.
1-5
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
i7100
PWR
AF
RF/SQL
TX / RX
CLR
M-CH
PBT
BANK
RIT
RIT
MENU
NB
NR
NOTCH
SET
AUTO TUNE RX➔CS
TUNER/CALL
MIC/RF PWR
SPEED/PITCH
P.AMP ATT
DR
QUICK
XFC
!7 !8 !9 @0
SPEECH
MPAD
@1
❍ RX CALL SIGN CAPTURE KEY Operation
(p. 71)
(Mode: DV, when the DR mode is selected)
➥ Push to open the “RX>CS” screen.
Push again to retune to the previous screen.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to set the received call
signs (station and repeaters) as the operating
call sign.
!7 DR MODE KEY DR (p. 85)
➥ Push to select the DR mode.
• When DR mode is selected, the transceiver automatically selects the DV mode.
➥ In the DR mode, push to cancel it.
• The transceiver returns to the previous screen before
entering the DR mode.
!8 SET MODE KEY SET (p. 85)
➥ Push to enter or exit the SET mode.
@1 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK KEY XFC
➥ During split frequency or repeater operation, hold
down to listen to the transmit frequency. (p. 82)
• “Voice Memo,” “Call Sign,” “RX History,” “DV Memory,”
“My Station,” “DV Set,” “GPS,” “SPEECH,” “QSO/RX
Log,” “Function,” “Tone Control,” “Connector,” “Display,” “Time Set,” “SD Card” and “Others” set group
are available.
• While holding down this switch, the transmit frequency can be changed with the Dial or MPAD .
• When the Split Lock function is turned ON, hold down
XFC to cancel the Dial lock function. (pp. 82, 162)
!9 QUICK MENU KEY QUICK (p. 85)
➥ Push to open to close the Quick Menu window.
➥ When the RIT function is turned ON, hold down to
listen to the receive frequency. (RIT is temporarily
cancelled.) (p. 69)
➥ In the simplex operation, hold down to monitor the
receive frequency.
• The Quick Menu is used to quickly select various
functions.
➥ In the setting screen, hold down for 1 second to
open the Default set window.
• While holding down this key, the squelch is opened
and the interference reject function is temporary OFF.
• Touch “Default” to reset to the default setting.
@0 AUTOTUNE/RXCS KEY AUTO TUNE RXCS (p. 85)
❍ AUTOTUNE KEY Operation (p. 71)
(Mode: CW)
➥ Push to automatically adjust for a zero beat
with the received signal.
➥ In the DV mode, the RX monitoring mode is selected by holding down this key. (p. 118)
Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the
same frequency.
• “AUTO TUNE” blinks when auto tune function is
activated.
• When the RIT function is ON, the auto tune function changes the RIT frequency, not the displayed
frequency.
1-6
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
i7100
PWR
AF
RF/SQL
TX / RX
@5
CLR
M-CH
BANK
@4
PBT
RIT
RIT
MENU
NB
NR
NOTCH
SET
AUTO TUNE RX➔CS
TUNER/CALL
MIC/RF PWR
SPEED/PITCH
P.AMP ATT
DR
QUICK
XFC
SPEECH
MPAD
@2 @3
@2 SPEECH/LOCK SWITCH SPEECH
❍ SPEECH KEY Operation (p. 45)
Push to audibly announce the S-meter level, the
displayed frequency and the operating mode.
@3 MEMO PAD KEY MPAD (p. 144)
➥ Push to sequentially call up the contents from the
memo pads.
The 5 (or 10) most recently programmed frequencies and operating modes can be recalled, starting from the most recent.
• The S-Level announcement can be turned OFF in the
“S-Level SPEECH” item of the “SPEECH” Set mode.
(p. 164)
SET > SPEECH > S-Level SPEECH
• When RIT is ON, the RIT offset is not included in the
frequency announcement.
• The memo pad capacity can be increased from 5 to
10 in the “Memopad Numbers” item of the “Function”
Set mode (p. 164)
SET > Function > Memopad Numbers
➥ Hold down for 1 second to write the displayed
data into a memo pad.
❍ LOCK KEY Operation (p. 77)
Hold down for 1 second to turn the Lock function
ON or OFF.
• The 5 most recent entries remain in the memo pads.
@4 MAIN DIAL
Rotate to change the displayed frequency, select the
Set mode settings, and so on.
• The function electronically locks the Dial.
•“
” appears when the function is ON.
• The function can be select the Dial lock and Panel
lock in the “Lock Function” item of the “Function” Set
mode. (p. 164)
SET > Function > Lock Function
@5 MAIN DIAL TENSION LATCH
Select the Dial drag.
• Three positions are selectable. The upper side setting
turns on clicks as the dial is turned.
NOTE: The [SPEECH/LOCK] switch operation to
activate the voice synthesizer or the Lock functions can be replaced in the “[SPEECH/LOCK]
Switch” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 164)
SET > Function > Lock Function
1-7
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
D Display
t y
u i
!0
@1
@2
!1
!2
@0 !9 !8
!3
!7
!4
!5
!6
@3
@4
@5
q TX ICON
Indicates either the displayed frequency can be
transmitted, or not.
➥“
” appears while the operating frequency is in
an amateur band.
” appears while the operating frequency is
➥“
not in an amateur band. However, when the “Band
Edge Beep” item is set to “OFF” in the “Function”
” does not appear.
Set mode (p. 85), “
t QUICK TUNING ICON
Appears when the Quick tuning mode is selected.
• When “Z” is displayed, the frequency changes in pre-set
kHz or 1 MHz quick tuning steps. (p. 38)
• When “Z” is not displayed, the frequency changes in 10
Hz or 1 Hz steps. (pp. 37, 39)
y FREQUENCY READOUTS
➥ Displays the operating frequency.
➥ Touch the MHz digits to enter the Band selection
screen.
➥ Touch the MHz digits for 1 second to turn the 1
MHz quick tuning mode ON or OFF.
➥ Touch the kHz digits to turn the pre-set kHz quick
tuning mode ON or OFF.
➥ Touch the kHz digits for 1 second to enter the Tuning step selection screen.
➥ Touch the Hz digits to for 1 second to toggle between 10 Hz and 1 Hz steps.
SET > Function > Band Edge Beep
➥ “LMT” appears while the output power is decreased due to the Power FET’s temperature is
high.
➥ “HOT” appears while the transmission is inhibited
due to the Power FET’s temperature is too high.
w MODE ICONS (p. 43)
➥ Displays the selected operating mode.
• “-D” appears when SSB data, AM data or FM data
mode is selected.
➥ Touch to enter the Mode selection screen.
u SD CARD ICON
➥ “ ” appears when an SD card is inserted.
➥ “ ” and “ ” alternately blinks while accessing the
SD card.
• On the Mode selection screen, touch the block to select the operating mode.
e PASSBAND WIDTH ICON (p. 75, 77)
Graphically displays the passband width for twin
PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift operation.
i CLOCK READOUT
Shows the current time.
r IF FILTER ICON (p. 75, 77)
➥ Shows the selected IF ﬁlter.
➥ Touch to select one of three IF ﬁlter settings.
o SPLIT ICON (p. 82)
Appears when the Split function is turned ON.
• UTC time or local time can be selected.
o LOCK INDICATOR (p. 37)
Appears when the Lock function is activated.
• The selected ﬁlter passband width and shifting value
are displayed for 2 seconds on the window.
➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “FILTER” screen
(Filter) to adjust the ﬁlter passband width.
➥ When the “FILTER” screen is displayed, touch for
1 second to return to the previous screen.
!0 LOCK ICON (p. 77)
Appears when the Lock function is turned ON.
1-8
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
D Display
t y
u i
!0
@1
@2
!1
!2
@0 !9 !8
!3
!7
!4
!5
!6
@3
@4
@5
!5 RIT ICON (pp. 69, 81)
➥ “RIT” appears when the RIT function is turned
ON.
➥ Shows the shift frequency of the RIT function.
!0 1⁄4 TUNING DIAL SPEED ICON (p. 39)
(Mode: SSB-D/CW/RTTY)
“1/4” appears when the tuning dial speed is set so
that one rotation is equal to 1⁄4 of the normal rotation.
!6 VOICE SQUELCH CONTROL ICON (p. 146)
Appears when the VSC (Voice Squelch Control)
function is turned ON.
• This function is available only when the quick tuning
function is turned OFF.
!1 VOX ICON (p. 78)
Appears when the VOX function is activated.
!7 PRIORITY WATCH INDICATOR (p. 113)
Appears while priority scan is activated.
!2 PREAMP ICON (p. 71)
Appears when a preampliﬁer is turned ON.
!8 NOTCH ICONS (p. 77)
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
➥ “MN” appears when the Manual Notch function is
turned ON.
(Mode: SSB/AM/FM)
➥ “AN” appears when the Automatic Notch function
is turned ON.
• In HF/50 MHz frequency band, either “P.AMP1” or
“P.AMP2” is displayed when the preamp 1 or preamp 2
is ON.
• In 144/430 MHz frequency band, “P.AMP” is displayed
when the preamp is ON.
!2 ATTENUATOR ICON (p. 71)
Appears when the Attenuator function is turned
ON.
!9 NOISE REDUCTION ICON (p. 77)
Appears when the Noise Reduction function is
turned ON.
!3 AGC ICONS (p. 72)
Displays the selected AGC time constant.
@0 NOISE BLANKER ICON (p. 76)
Appears when the Noise Blanker function is turned
ON.
• “AGC-F” for AGC fast; “AGC-M” for AGC middle; “AGC-S”
for AGC slow; “AGC-OFF” for AGC OFF.
• In the FM, WFM and DV mode, “AGC-F” for AGC fast is
ﬁxed.
@1 VFO/MEMORY ICONS (p. 34)
➥ “VFOA” or “VFOB” appears whether VFO A or
VFO B is selected.
➥ “MEMO” appears when the memory mode is selected.
!4 DUPLEX ICON (p. 65)
“DUP+” appears when plus duplex, “DUP –” appears
when minus duplex (repeater) operation is selected.
1-9
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
D Display
t y
u i
!0
@1
@2
!1
!2
@0 !9 !8
!3
!7
!4
!5
!6
@3
@4
@5
@4 INFORMATION READOUT (p. 80)
Displays the transmit frequency of the Split operation, descriptions of the memory channel or Received Call sign on the DV mode, and so on.
@2 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUT (p. 100)
➥ Shows the selected memory channel, scan edge
channel or Call channel.
• Memory bank indicator (A to E) appears to the left of
memory channel.
@5 FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 19)
Shows the function of the Touch keys.
➥ Touch to toggle between the VFO and Memory
modes.
• Push MENU to change the set of functions assigned to
touch keys.
• Toggles the function display menu between M-1 (M-1
menu), M-2 (M-2 menu), M-3 (M-3 menu), D-1 (D-1
menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu).
@2 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL ICON
“” appears when the selected memory channel is
set as a select memory channel. (p. 151)
@3 MULTI-FUNCTION METER INDICATION
➥ Displays the signal strength while receiving.
➥ Displays the relative output power, SWR, ALC or
compression levels while transmitting.
➥ When the Meter Peak Hold function is ON, the
peak level of a received signal strength or the
output power is displayed for approximately 0.5
seconds.
➥ Touch to select the RF power, SWR, ALC or Compression meter.
➥ Touch for 1 second to display the Multi-function
meter.
1-10
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (Controller) (Continued)
D Display
➥ Push MENU to change the set of functions assigned
to touch keys.
• Toggles the function display menu between M-1 (M-1
menu), M-2 (M-2 menu), M-3 (M-3 menu), D-1 (D-1
menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu).
• Functions vary, depending on the operating mode.
• In the DR mode, the D-1 (D-1 menu) and D-2 (D-2 menu)
can be selected.
➥ Touch or touch for 1 second to select the displayed
functions.
D M-1 (M-1 menu) Display
D M-3 (M-3 menu) Display
(Mode: SSB/AM/AM-D)
D M-2 (M-2 menu) Display
(Mode: SSB-D/RTTY)
(Mode: SSB)
(Mode: CW)
(Mode: SSB-D)
(Mode: FM/FM-D/WFM/DV)
(Mode: CW)
D D-1 (D-1 menu) Display
(Mode: RTTY)
(Mode: DV, when the DR mode is selected)
(Mode: AM/AM-D)
D D-2 (D-2 menu) Display
(Mode: DV, when the DR mode is selected)
(Mode: FM/FM-D/WFM)
(Mode: DV)
1-11
Previous view
PANEL DESCRIPTION
D Function keys on M-1 display
DIGITAL SQUELCH KEY [DSQL] (p. 114)
(Mode: DV)
➥ Push to select a digital squelch function between
digital call sign squelch and digital code squelch.
➥ Hold down for 1 second to display the “DSQ” screen
(digital squelch).
SCAN KEY [SCAN] (p. 147)
Touch to display the “SCAN” screen.
SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 82)
➥ Touch to turn the split function ON or OFF.
• “SPLIT” appears when the split function is ON.
➥ Touch for 1 second to activate the quick split function.
MEMORY KEYER MENU KEY [KEYER] (p. 50)
(Mode: CW)
Push to display the “KEY” screen (memory keyer) or the
“SEND” screen (keyer send), depending on the “KEYER
1st Menu” option in the Set mode (p. 165).
• The transmit frequency shifts from the receive frequency
according to the “SPLIT Offset” option in the Set mode.
(p. 162)
• The quick split function can be turned OFF in the “Quick
SPLIT” item of the Set mode. (p. 162)
SPEECH COMPRESSOR KEY [COMP] (p. 80)
(Mode: SSB)
➥ Touch to turn the speech compressor function ON
or OFF.
VFO SELECT SWITCH [A/B] (pp. 32, 34)
➥ Touch to select either VFO A or VFO B.
➥ Touch for 1 second to equalize the undisplayed VFO
settings to that of the displayed VFO.
• “COMP” is displayed when the speech compressor is
ON.
➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “COMP” screen.
VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [V/M]
➥ Touch to switch between the VFO and memory
modes. (pp. 34, 139)
RTTY MENU KEY [RTTY] (p. 57)
Touch to display the “RTTY” screen.
• Touching Memory channel also selects the VFO or memory modes. (p. 162)
CALL SIGN KEY [CS](F-1) (p. 85)
(Mode: DV)
Touch to display the “CS” screen.
➥ Touch for 1 second to copy the memory contents to
the displayed VFO on the MAIN Band. (p. 142)
• The current call sign for DV operation appears.
MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 140)
Touch for 1 second to store VFO data into the selected
memory channel.
TRANSMISSION BANDWIDTH KEY [TBW] (p. 80)
(Mode: SSB)
➥ Touch to display the selected transmission bandwidth.
➥ Touch for 1 second to select the transmission bandwidth.
• This can be done in both the VFO and memory modes.
D Function keys on M-2 display
• Bandwidth is selectable from wide (WIDE), middle (MID)
and narrow (NAR).
DUPLEX KEY [DUP] (p. 65)
➥ Touch to select the duplex direction, or to turn OFF
the function.
1⁄4 TUNING FUNCTION KEY [1⁄4] (p. 39)
(Mode: SSB-D/CW/RTTY)
Touch to turn the 1⁄4 Tuning function ON or OFF.
• “DUP–” or “DUP+” is displayed during duplex operation.
➥ In the FM mode, touch for 1 second to turn the onetouch repeater function ON or OFF.
•“
AGC KEY [AGC] (p. 72)
(Mode: SSB/SSB-D/CW/RTTY/AM/AM-D)
➥ Touch to select the time constant of the AGC circuit.
➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “AGC” screen.
” is displayed when the 1⁄4 Tuning function is ON.
CALL RECORD KEY [CD] (p. 95)
(Mode: DV)
Touch to display the “CD” screen.
• The call record channel appears. (RX01 to RX20)
TONE SQUELCH KEY [TONE] (pp. 62–64)
(Mode: FM)
➥ Touch to select a tone function between subaudible
(repeater) tone, tone squelch and DTCS code.
➥ Touch for 1 second to display the “TONE” screen of
the selected tone function.
1-12
Previous view
Section 4
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating SSB .........................................................................4-2
Operating CW...........................................................................4-3
About the CW reverse mode ...................................................4-4
About keying speed .................................................................4-4
About CW pitch control............................................................4-4
CW sidetone function ..............................................................4-5
CW Auto tune function ............................................................4-5
Electronic keyer functions ......................................................4-6
Memory keyer menu construction ...........................................4-6
Memory keyer send menu .......................................................4-7
Editing a memory keyer...........................................................4-8
Contest number Set mode ......................................................4-9
Keyer Set mode .......................................................................4-10
Operating RTTY (FSK).............................................................4-12
The functions for RTTY operation..........................................4-13
About RTTY reverse mode ......................................................4-13
Twin Peak Filter .......................................................................4-13
RTTY Set mode.......................................................................4-14
RTTY decoder .........................................................................4-15
RTTY decode Set mode ..........................................................4-16
Transmitting an RTTY memory................................................4-17
Editing an RTTY memory ........................................................4-18
Turning ON the RTTY decode log ...........................................4-19
RTTY decode log Set mode ....................................................4-20
Operating AM/FM .....................................................................4-21
Tone squelch operation ..........................................................4-22
DTCS operation .......................................................................4-23
Tone scan/DTCS code scan operation ..................................4-24
Repeater operation ..................................................................4-25
Repeater access tone frequency setting .................................4-26
One-touch repeater function....................................................4-27
Transmit frequency monitor check ...........................................4-28
1750 Hz tone burst ..................................................................4-28
Turning ON the Auto Repeater function
(U.S.A. and Korea versions only).............................................4-29
D Storing a non standard repeater ............................................4-30
4-1
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating SSB
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, touch “SSB” to select
the LSB or USB mode.
Left
• When operating above 10 MHz, USB is selected ﬁrst;
when operating below 10 MHz, LSB is selected ﬁrst.
• After selecting LSB or USB, touch “SSB” again to toggle
between USB and LSB modes, if necessary.
• To select the data mode, after selecting LSB or USB,
touch “DATA” to select the data mode, if needed.
Display
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
e Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal.
• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.
• The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step selection screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)
“LSB” or “USB” appears
r Rotate [AF] (L)to adjust the audio to a comfortable listening level.
t Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice
level.
u If necessary, adjust the microphone gain or RF power on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.
q Push MIC/RF PWR (C) to open the MIC gain/RF
power adjustment display.
TX meter
w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to adjust the MIC gain, or
[BANK] (L) to adjust the RF power.
• To adjust the MIC gain, touch the TX meter to select
the ALC meter. And then, adjust it so that the ALC
meter reading stays within the ALC zone.
When the MIC gain is adjusted too high, your
transmitted voice may be distorted.
e Push
MENU
(C) to close the display.
i Release [PTT] to receive.
Convenient Receive functions
• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)
• Noise blanker (p. 76)
• Noise reduction (p. 77)
• Notch ﬁlter (p. 77)
• Receive ﬁlter width (HPF/LPF) (p. 169)
• Tone control (p. 169)
Convenient Transmit functions
• Speech compressor (p. 78)
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 80)
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 81)
• Transmit ﬁlter width (p. 80)
• Tone control (p. 169)
4-2
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating CW
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, touch “CW” to select
the CW mode.
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
• After the CW mode is selected, touch “CW” again to toggle between CW and CW-R modes, if necessary.
e Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal.
• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.
• The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step selection screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)
Center
r Rotate [AF] (L) to adjust the audio to a comfortable listening level.
t Set the Break-in operation to the semi break-in or full
break-in mode.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
“CW” or “CW-R” appears
• “BKIN,” “F-BKIN” or “OFF (no indication)” appears.
While the “M-3” menu is selected, touch [BK-IN](D)
once or twice to select the Break-in operation.
• BKIN
: Semi break-in
• F-BKIN : Full break-in
• OFF
: No break-in (ACC socket connection for TX
is necessary, as shown on page 22.)
If a microphone is connected, its PTT can be
used instead of the external TX switch.
Appears
y If the Semi break-in operation is selected at step t,
set the Break-in delay.
q While the “M-3” menu is selected, touch
[BK-IN](D) for 1 second to open the Break-in
delay adjustment window.
w Rotate the Dial to adjust the delay time.
Semi break-in operation is selected
• The adjustable delay time is between 2.0 and 13.0
dots.
u Use the electric keyer or paddle to key your CW signals.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• The Po meter indicates transmitted CW output power.
i If desired, adjust the Key speed or CW pitch.
Convenient Receive functions
• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)
• Noise blanker (p. 76)
• Noise reduction (p. 77)
• Manual Notch ﬁlter (p. 77)
• ¼ function (p. 39)
• CW pitch control (p. 49)
q Push SPEED/PITCH (C) to open the Key speed/CW
pitch adjustment window.
w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to adjust the Key speed, or
[BANK] (L) to the CW pitch.
• The adjustable key speed is between 6 and 48 wpm
(words per minute).
• The adjustable CW pitch is between 300 and 900
Hz.
e Push
MENU
Convenient Transmit functions
• Break-in function (p. 79)
• Keying speed setting (p. 49)
• Memory keyer (p. 50)
(C) to close the window.
o Stop keying to return to receive.
4-3
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating CW (Continued)
D About the CW reverse mode
The CW reverse mode receives signals with a reverse
side CW carrier point similar to voice LSB and USB
modes.
Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal
and you want to reduce the interfering tone.
q On the Mode selection screen, touch “CW” to select
the CW mode.
w After the CW mode is selected, touch “CW” again on
the Mode selection screen to toggle between CW
and CW-R modes.
BFO
• Check that the interfering tone can be reduced.
BFO
Interference Desired signal
Interference Desired signal
CW mode (LSB side)
CW-R mode (USB side)
Carrier point
Left
The CW carrier point is set to the LSB side by default,
the setting can be changed to USB side in the “CW
Normal Side” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 165)
SET (C)
Display
> Function > CW Normal Side
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
D About keying speed
The transceiver’s internal electronic keyer speed can
be adjusted to between 6 and 48 wpm (words per minute).
q Push SPEED/PITCH (C) to open the Key speed/CW pitch
adjustment display.
w Rotate [M-CH] (L) clockwise to increase keying
speed; counterclockwise to decrease it.
e Push MENU (C) to close the display.
Key speed adjustment
D About CW pitch control
The received CW audio pitch can be adjusted to suit
your preference without changing the operating frequency.
q Push SPEED/PITCH (C) to open the Key speed/CW pitch
adjustment display.
w Rotate [BANK] (L) to suit your preference.
• Adjustable from 300 to 900 Hz (in 5 Hz steps).
e Push
MENU
(C) to close the display.
CW pitch adjustment
4-4
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating CW (Continued)
D CW sidetone function
When the transceiver is in the receive mode (and the
Break-in function is OFF— p. 79), you can listen to the
CW sidetone without actually transmitting.
You can also use the CW sidetone to practice CW sending, but be sure to turn OFF the Break-in function.
The CW sidetone level can be adjusted in the “Side
Tone Level” item of the Keyer Set mode (p. 54).
D CW Auto tune function
The automatic tuning function automatically tunes the
displayed frequency when an off-frequency signal is
received. This function is active while in the CW mode
is selected.
➥ Push AUTO TUNE RXCS (R) to automatically adjust for a
zero beat with the received signal.
Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same
frequency.
• “AUTO TUNE” blinks when auto tune function is activated.
• If AUTO TUNE RXCS (R) is pushed when the RIT function is ON,
the auto tune function changes the RIT frequency, not
the displayed frequency.
AUTO TUNE RXCS
AUTO TUNE icon
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal with
interference, the automatic tuning function may tune the
receiver to an undesired signal.
If the off-frequency signal is too far away, the Auto tune function may not work. In that case, an error beep sounds.
4-5
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Electronic keyer functions
You can access a number of convenient built-in electronic keyer functions in the memory keyer menu.
Left
q In the CW mode, push MENU (C) one or more times
to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Touch [KEYER](D), and then push MENU (C) to display the “KEYER” screen (Memory Keyer).
e Touch [SEND], [EDIT], [001] or [SET](D) to select
the desired menu.
See the diagram below.
Display
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• Push MENU (C) to return to the previous display.
D Memory keyer menu construction
The screen you want to appear ﬁrst can be selected
in the “KEYER 1st Menu” item of the “Function” Set
mode. (p. 165)
SET (C)
> Function > KEYER 1st Menu
• Keyer Memory (Edit) screen (p. 52)
[EDIT]
[KEYER]
• Keyer Send screen (p. 51)
[SEND]
• Keyer 001 (Contest number Set) screen (p. 53)
[001]
Push
MENU
• Keyer (Root) screen
• Keyer Set screen (p. 54)
[SET]
[SEND]
[001]
[EDIT]
[SET]
: Returns to the previous display.
4-6
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Electronic keyer functions (Continued)
D Memory keyer send menu
Preset characters can be sent using the Keyer Send
screen. Contents of the memory keyer are enterd in the
Keyer Memory (Edit) screen.
• Transmitting
q In the CW mode, turn ON the Break-in function. (p.
79)
Touch [KEYER]
• When the Break-in function is OFF and you do step r,
you can listen the memory keyer contents without transmitting.
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
e Touch [KEYER](D) to display the “KEYER SEND”
screen.
• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, touch
[SEND](D) to display the “KEYER SEND” screen.
r Touch one of the Memory keys, [M1] to [M4](D), to
send the memory keyer contents.
• Touch a Memory key for 1 second to repeatedly send the
contents; touch any Memory key to stop the transmission.
• Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 60 seconds (1
second steps) in the “Keyer Repeat Time” item of the
“KEYER SET” screen. (p. 54)
• “M1”– “M4” are highlighted while transmitting.
• The contest number counter advances each time the
contents are sent.
• Push [−1](D) to reduce the contest number advances by
one before sending the memory keyer contents to a station a second time.
• M1 sending display
• M2 sending display
Counter
Count up trigger icon
t Push MENU (C) to return to the “KEYER” (Root)
screen.
• M3 sending display
For your information
When an external keypad is connected to pin 3 and
pin 7 of the [MIC] connector, the contents of M1 to
M4 can be transmitted without selecting the “KEYER
SEND” screen.
See page 167 for details.
• M4 sending display
• While transmitting repeatedly
“ [ ” and “ ] ” appear
4-7
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Electronic keyer functions (Continued)
D Editing a memory keyer
Left
The contents of the memory keyer memories can be
set on the Keyer Memory (Edit) screen. The memory
keyer can memorize and retransmit 4 CW key codes for
often-used CW sentences, contest numbers or a count
up trigger. The total capacity of the memory keyer is 70
characters per memory channel.
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
• Programming contents
q In the CW mode, push MENU (C) one or more times
to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Touch [KEYER](D) to display the “KEYER SEND”
screen.
• Memory keyer programming mode
“KEYER” (Root) screen
• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, skip step e.
e Push MENU (C) to display the “KEYER” screen.
r Touch [EDIT](D) to display the “KEYER MEMORY”
(Edit) screen.
Touch [EDIT]
• The memory contents are displayed.
t Touch for 1 second on a desired memory channel to
be edited, and then touch “Edit.”
Touch the desired
channel for 1 second
• The memory programming screen appears.
y Touch the desired block one or more times to select
the desired character, number or symbol.
Selectable characters, numbers and symbols
A to Z, 0 to 9, ⁄ ? ^ . , @ ✱
• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input
and Number input mode.
• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selection window.
• Touch “” to input a space.
Touch “Edit”
When inputting an asterisk, the
counter is incremented by 1.
• M2 default indication
u Touch [](D) or [](D) to move the cursor backwards or forwards.
i Repeat steps y and u to program up to 70 characters of memory contents, and then push [ENT](D).
o Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
“KEYER” (Root) screen.
Move the cursor
Delete a character
Select a Symbol
Enter
NOTE:
“^” is used to transmit a string of characters with no
inter-character space. Put a “^” before a text string such
as ^AR, and the string “AR” is sent with no space.
Cancel edit
Input a space
Select Alphabet or Number input
Move the cursor
“✱” is used to insert the CW contest number. The number
automatically advances by 1. This function is available for
only one memory keyer channel at a time. “✱” is used in
• Preprogrammed memory keyer contents
memory keyer channel M2 by default.
Memory keyer
channel
M1
M2
M3
M4
4-8
Contents
CQ TEST CQ TEST DE JA1 JA1 TEST
UR 5NN✱ BK
CFM TU
QRZ?
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Electronic keyer functions (Continued)
D Contest number Set mode
This mode is used to set the contest number, count up
trigger and Present number.
The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
• Setting contents
q In the CW mode, push MENU (C) one or more times
to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Push [KEYER](D) to display the “KEYER SEND”
screen.
L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• Contest number Set mode
“KEYER” (Root) screen
• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, skip step e.
e Push MENU (C) to display the “KEYER” screen.
r Push [001](D) to enter the “KEYER 001” (Contest
Number Set) screen.
t Touch the desired item to select.
y Touch the desired option or rotate the Dial to change
the setting.
Touch [001]
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default
set window, then select “Default” to reset to the default
setting.
Touch the item
(Example: Number Style)
u Push MENU (C) to return to the “KEYER” (Root)
screen.
Number Style
(Default: Normal)
This item sets the numbering system used for contest
numbers— normal or short morse numbers.
Short morse numbers are also referred to as “cut”
numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
Normal:
190➔ANO:
190➔ANT:
90➔NO:
90➔NT:
Touch the option
(Example:
190➔ANO)
Does not use short morse numbers
Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.
Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.
Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.
Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.
Count Up Trigger
• To the default setting
(Default: M2)
Set the count-up trigger to one of four memory slots for
the contest number exchange. The count-up trigger allows the contest number to automatically advance after
each complete number exchange is sent.
Touch the item
for 1 second.
• M1, M2, M3 or M4 can be set.
Present Number
• Default set window
(Default: 001)
This item shows the current number for the count-up
trigger channel set above.
Touch “Default.”
• Touch [+] or [–](D) or rotate the Dial to change the
number.
• Hold down the item for 1 second to display the default
set window, then touch “Default” to set the counter to
“001.”
4-9
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Electronic keyer functions (Continued)
D Keyer Set mode
Left
This Set mode is used to set the CW sidetone, memory
keyer repeat time, dash weight, paddle speciﬁcations,
keyer type, and so on.
• Setting contents
q In the CW mode, push MENU (C) one or more times
to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Push [KEYER](D) to display the “KEYER SEND”
screen.
Display
Center
• If the “KEYER” (Root) screen is displayed, skip step e.
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• Keyer Set mode
e Push MENU (C) to display the “KEYER” screen.
r Touch [SET](D) to enter the “KEYER SET” screen.
t Touch the desired item to select.
“KEYER” screen (Memory Keyer)
• See the next page for details of the set items and options.
Touch [SET]
y Touch the desired option or rotate the Dial to change
the value.
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
u Touch [](D) or push
“KEYER” (Root) screen.
MENU
(C) to return to the
Moves to the
next page
Returns to the
previous page
(Example: Touch the “Side Tone Level.”)
4-10
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Electronic keyer functions (Continued)
D Keyer set mode (Continued)
Side Tone Level
Rise Time
(Default: 50%)
(Default: 4ms)
Select the CW sidetone output level.
Set the rise time of the transmitted CW envelope.
• 0 to 100% can be selected.
• 2, 4, 6 or 8 milliseconds can be selected.
Side Tone Level Limit
About rise time
(Default: ON)
Key action
Set the CW sidetone level limit. When the [AF] (L)
control is rotated above a speciﬁed level, the CW
sidetone does not increase.
Set Tx power level
Tx output power
• OFF: CW sidetone level is not limited.
• ON: CW sidetone level is limited.
Keyer Repeat Time
Tx
Rx
Time
Rise time
Key clicks on nearby frequencies can be generated if
the rise time of a CW waveform is too short.
(Default: 2sec)
When sending CW using the repeat timer, set the time
between transmissions.
Paddle Polarity
• 1 to 60 seconds in 1 second steps can be selected.
(Default: NORMAL)
Set the paddle polarity.
Dot/Dash Ratio
(Default: 1:1:3.0)
• Normal or reverse polarity can be selected.
Set the dot/dash ratio.
• 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.
Keyer Type
Keying weight example: Morse code “K”
Select the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY] connector on the
controller.
(Default: ELEC-KEY)
DOT (fixed*)
Weight setting:
1:1:3 (default)
DASH
Weight setting:
Adjusted
Adjustable range
DASH
• Straight key, BUG-KEY or ELEC-KEY can be selected.
Regardless of this setting, the [KEY] connector of
the Main unit is for only a straight key.
SPACE (fixed*)
*SPACE and DOT length can be adjusted on the
Key Speed/CW pitch adjustment display.
MIC Up/Down Keyer
(Default: OFF)
Set the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches to be used as
a key. (The microphone [UP]/[DN] switches do not work
as a “squeeze key.”)
• ON:
The [UP]/[DN] switches can be used as a key
for CW.
• OFF: The [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used as a
key for CW.
• When “ON” is selected, the frequency and memory
channels cannot be changed using the [UP]/[DN]
switches.
• The optional HM-151 microphone cannot be used
as a MIC Up/Down Keyer.
4-11
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating RTTY (FSK)
When using your RTTY terminal or TNC, consult the
manual that comes with the equipment.
Left
Display
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, touch “RTTY” to select the RTTY mode.
• After the RTTY mode is selected, touch “RTTY” again to
toggle between the normal and reverse modes, if needed.
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
e Enter the RTTY decoder screen.
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
“RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size
between normal and wide.
r Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal.
• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.
• If the received signal cannot be demodulated, try to select the RTTY reverse mode in step w.
• The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step selection screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)
Touch [DEC]
t Switch ON the external TX switch to set the transceiver to the transmit mode, or transmit a SEND signal from your TNC.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• The Po meter displays the transmitted RTTY signal
strength.
y Use your connected PC or TNC (TU) to transmit
RTTY (FSK) signals.
u Switch OFF the external TX switch to receive.
Convenient Receive functions
• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)
• Noise blanker (p. 76)
• Noise reduction (p. 77)
• Notch ﬁlter (p. 77)
• ¼ function (p. 39)
• Twin Peak Filter (p. 58)
Rotate the Dial to the point where both
sides of the dots equally appear.
4-12
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation
D About RTTY reverse mode
Left
Received characters are occasionally garbled when
the Mark and Space signals are reversed. This reversal
can be caused by incorrect TNC connections, setting
or commands.
To correctly receive reversed RTTY signals, select the
RTTY reverse mode.
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
Display
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
q On the Mode selection screen, touch “RTTY” to select the RTTY mode.
w After the RTTY mode is selected, touch “RTTY” again
on the Mode selection screen, toggles between the
normal and reverse modes.
Normal
170 Hz
• “RTTY-R” appears when the RTTY reverse mode is selected.
Reverse
2125 Hz
Space Mark
BFO
2125 Hz
BFO
170 Hz
Space
Mark
D Twin Peak Filter
The Twin Peak Filter changes the receive frequency response by boosting 2125 and 2295 Hz for better copying of RTTY signals.
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
w Touch [RTTY](D) to display the “RTTY SET”
screen.
e Touch the “Twin Peak Filter” item to select.
r Touch “ON” to turn ON the Twin Peak Filter.
t Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
“M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
Touch [RTTY]
Touch “Twin
Peak Filter”
NOTE: When the Twin Peak Filter is in use, the received audio output may increase. This is normal;
not a malfunction.
Touch “ON”
4-13
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)
D RTTY Set mode
Left
The RTTY Set mode is used to set the Twin peak ﬁlter
function, mark and shift frequencies and the keying polarity.
• Setting contents
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
w Touch [RTTY](D) to display the “RTTY SET”
screen.
e Touch the desired item to select.
Display
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• See below for details of the set items and options.
r Touch the desired option or rotate the Dial to change
the setting.
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
Touch [RTTY]
t Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
“M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
Touch the item
(Example: Mark
Frequency)
Touch the option
(Example: 1275)
Twin Peak Filter
Shift Width
(Default: OFF)
Turn the Twin Peak Filter ON or OFF.
Mark Frequency
(Default: 170)
Select the RTTY frequency shift.
• 170, 200 and 425 Hz are selectable.
(Default: 2125)
Select the RTTY mark frequency.
Keying Polarity
(Default: NORMAL)
Select normal or reverse keying polarity.
• 1275, 1615 and 2125 Hz are selectable.
• NORMAL:
• REVERSE:
4-14
Key open/close = Mark/Space
Key open/close = Space/Mark
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)
D RTTY decoder
The transceiver has an RTTY decoder for Baudot (mark
frequency: 2125 Hz, shift frequency: 170 Hz, 45 bps).
An external terminal unit (TU) or terminal node connector (TNC) is not necessary for receiving a Baudot
signal.
Touch [DEC]
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size between normal and wide.
e Touch [HOLD](D) to turn ON the Hold function to
hold the current screen.
• “H” appears when this function is turned ON.
• Touch [HOLD](D) again to turn OFF the Hold function.
Hold function
ON/OFF
r Touch [CLR](D) for 1 second to clear the displayed
characters.
Appears when the Hold function
is turned ON.
• “H” disappears at the same time as the displayed characters are cleared. (The hold function is cancelled.)
t Push
M-2).
MENU
Clear the character
(C) to return to the “M-2” screen (Menu
• Setting the decoder threshold level
If some characters are displayed when no signal is received, adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level.
The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size between normal and wide.
e Touch [<1>](D) to display the RTTY decoder (2)
screen.
• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY decoder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.
Touch [ADJ]
r Touch [ADJ](D) to select the threshold level adjustment mode.
t Rotate the Dial to adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level.
• Touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the default setting, if desired.
y Push
MENU
(C) to exit the adjustment mode.
The number of the decoder display lines, the UnShift
On Space (USOS) function and new line code can
be set in the RTTY Set mode. (p. 60)
Touch for 1 second to reset
the threshold level to default.
Threshold level display
4-15
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)
D RTTY decode Set mode
The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
The RTTY decode Set mode is used to set the decode
USOS function, RTTY decoder new line code and the
TX USOS function.
L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• Setting contents
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size between normal and wide.
e Touch [<1>](D) to display the RTTY decoder (2)
screen.
Touch [SET]
• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY decoder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.
r Touch [SET](D) to enter the “RTTY DECODE SET”
screen.
t Touch the desired item to select.
• See below for details of the set items and options.
y Touch the desired option or rotate the Dial to change
the setting.
Touch the item
(Example: TX
USOS)
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
u Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
“KEYER” (Root) screen.
i Push MENU (C) to return to the “M-2” screen (Menu
2).
Decode USOS
Touch the option
(Example: OFF)
TX USOS
(Default: ON)
Turn the USOS (UnShift On Space) function ON or
OFF. This function decodes a letter code after receiving
a “space.”
Explicitly inserts the FIGS character, even though it is
not required by the receiving station.
• OFF: Inserts FIGS
• ON: Does not insert FIGS
• OFF: Decodes as a character code
• ON: Decodes as a letter code
Decode New Line
(Default: ON)
(Default: CR,LF,CR+LF)
Select the internal RTTY decoder new line code.
CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed
• CR,LF,CR+LF:Makes a new line with any code.
• CR+LF:
Makes a new line with only the CR+LF
code.
4-16
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)
D Transmitting an RTTY memory
Previously entered characters can be sent using the
RTTY memory. Contents of the memory are enter in
the RTTY Memory (Edit) screen.
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (Menu M-2).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size between normal and wide.
Touch [DEC]
e Touch [RTM](D) to display the RTTY memory
screen.
r Touch [](D) to select the memory group to transmit.
• Touch [](D) to toggle the memory group between RT1–
RT4 and RT5–RT8.
t Touch one of the memory keys, [RT1] to [RT4], or
[RT5] to [RT8](D).
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
• The TX contents are displayed beside the “
y Push
M-2).
MENU
Touch [RTM]
” icon.
RTTY memory screen (RT1–RT4)
(C) to return to the “M-2” screen (Menu
For your information
When an external keypad is connected to [MIC] connector on the Controller, one of RT1 to RT4 RTTY
memory contents can be transmitted while the RTTY
decode screen is selected in the RTTY mode. (pgs.
18, 133)
RTTY memory screen (RT5–RT8)
Left
Display
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• Transmits RT6
Touch [RT6]
The TX contents are displayed
4-17
“
” blinks
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)
D Editing an RTTY memory
The contents of the RTTY memories can be set on the
RTTY Memory (Edit) screen. The RTTY memory can
memorize and retransmit 8 RTTY message for oftenused RTTY information. The total capacity of the RTTY
memory is 70 characters per memory channel.
• RTTY memory programming mode
• Programming contents
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
Touch [EDIT]
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size between normal and wide.
Touch the desired
channel for 1 second
e Touch [<1>](D) to display the RTTY decoder (2)
screen.
• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY decoder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.
r Touch [EDIT](D) to display the “RTTY MEMORY”
(Edit) screen.
• The memory contents are displayed.
t Touch for 1 second on a desired memory channel to
be edited, and then touch “Edit.”
• Touch [ ] or [ ](D) to select the displayed page.
• The memory programming screen appears.
Touch “Edit”
y Touch the desired block one or more times to select
the desired character or symbol.
Selectable characters and symbols
• RT1 default indication
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
1234567890
Move the cursor
! $ & ? " ' – / ., :;( ) 
Delete a character
• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input
and Number input mode.
• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selection window.
• Touch “” to input a space.
Select a Symbol
Enter
Cancel edit
Input a space
Select Alphabet or Number input
u Touch [](D) or [](D) to move the cursor backwards or forwards.
i Repeat steps y and u to program up to 70 characters of memory contents, and then push [ENT](D).
o Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
RTTY Decode (2) screen.
Left
Display
Center
Move the cursor
• Preprogrammed contents
CH
Contents
RT1
DE ICOM ICOM K
RT2
DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
RT3
QSL UR 599–599 BK
RT4
QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599 BK
RT5
73 GL SK
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
RT6
CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K
RT7
MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7100 & ANTENNA IS A
3–ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI.
RT8
MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK UNIT &
DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–7100.
4-18
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)
D Turning ON the RTTY decode log
Left
Turn ON the RTTY decode log to store your RTTY operating record, both TX and RX, into an SD card.
Be sure to insert the SD card, otherwise this function
does not work properly. The SD card is not supplied
byu Icom.
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
Display
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• RTTY decode log
SD card icon
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size between normal and wide.
e Touch [<1>](D) to display the RTTY decoder (2)
screen.
• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY decoder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.
r Touch [LOG](D) to display the “RTTY DECODE
LOG” screen.
t Touch “Decode Log,” and then select the RTTY decode log function ON or OFF.
Touch [LOG]
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default
set window, then select “Default” to reset to the default
setting.
• When “ON” is selected, the RTTY decode log starts.
y Touch [](D) or push
RTTY Decoder screen.
MENU
Touch “Decode
Log”
(C) to return to the
Touch “ON”
4-19
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
The functions for RTTY operation (Continued)
D RTTY decode log Set mode
The RTTY decode log Set mode is used to set the File
Type and the Time stamps.
q In the RTTY mode, push MENU (C) one or more
times to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Touch [DEC](D) to display the RTTY decoder
screen.
RTTY decode log Set mode
• Touch [WIDE](D) to toggle the decode screen size between normal and wide.
Touch [LOG]
e Touch [<1>](D) to display the RTTY decoder (2)
screen.
• Touch [<1>] or [<2>](D) to toggle between the RTTY decoder and the RTTY decode (2) screens.
r Touch [LOG](D) to display the “RTTY DECODE
LOG” screen.
t Touch “Log Set” to enter the “RTTY DECODE LOG
SET” screen.
y Touch the desired item to select.
Touch “Log Set”
• See below for details of the set items and options.
u Touch the desired option to change the setting.
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
i Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
“RTTY DECODE LOG” screen.
o Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
RTTY Decoder screen.
File type
Time stamp (time)
(Default: Text)
(Default: Local)
Select ﬁle type for saving a Log into an SD card, as the
Text or HTML format.
Select the time of the time stamp whether it is in local
or UTC.
• Text: Save as a Text format
• HTML: Save as an HTML format
NOTE: The time won’t be saved when “OFF” is selected
in “Time Stamp” to the left.
Time stamp
• Local: The time is used in Local time
• UTC: The time is used in UTC time
(Default: ON)
Adds the time stamp (date, transmission or reception
time) to the LOG ﬁle.
Time stamp (frequency)
(Default: ON)
Selects the time stamp data whether adding the frequency or not.
• OFF: Does not save the time stamp.
• ON: Saves the date and time data.
NOTE: The frequency won’t be saved when “OFF” is
selected in “Time Stamp” to the left.
• OFF: Does not save the frequency
• ON: Saves the frequency data
4-20
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Operating AM/FM
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, touch “AM” or “FM” to
select the AM or FM mode.
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
• To select the data mode, after selecting AM or FM, touch
“DATA” to select the data mode, if needed.
e Rotate the Dial to tune a desired signal.
• The S-meter displays the received signal strength.
• The tuning step can be changed on the Tuning step selection screen by touching “kHz frequency.” (p. 38)
Center
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
r Rotate [AF] (L)to adjust the audio to a comfortable listening level.
t Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit.
• The TX/RX indicator lights red.
“AM” or “FM” appears
y Speak into the microphone at your normal voice
level.
u If necessary, adjust the microphone gain or RF power on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.
q Push MIC/RF PWR (C) to open the MIC gain/RF
power adjustment display.
w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to adjust the MIC gain, or
[BANK] (L) to adjust the RF power.
• To adjust the MIC gain, adjust it with another station
listening to your voice for clarity.
When the MIC gain is adjusted too high, your
transmitted voice may be distorted.
e Push
MENU
(C) to close the display.
i Release [PTT] to receive.
NOTE: On the 144/440 MHz frequency band, you
can transmit in the AM mode.
Convenient Receive functions
• Preamp and attenuator (p. 71)
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 75)
This function is not usable in the FM mode.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 72)
• Noise blanker (p. 76)
• Noise reduction (p. 77)
• Notch ﬁlter (p. 77)
Convenient Transmit functions
• VOX (voice operated transmit) (p. 80)
• Transmit quality monitor (p. 81)
• Tone control (p. 169)
4-21
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Tone squelch operation
The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal
containing a matching subaudible tone. You can silently
wait for calls from others using the same tone.
Left
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select
the FM mode.
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
r Touch [TONE](D) one or more times to turn ON the
Tone squelch function.
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
TSQL icon
• “TSQL” appears.
• Touch [TONE](D) to toggle between “TONE,” “TSQL,”
“DTCS” and OFF (icon disappears).
t Touch [TONE](D) for 1 second to display the “TONE”
screen.
• “TSQL Tone” appears.
y Rotate the Dial to select the desired tone squelch
frequency. See the table shown below.
Touch [TONE]
for 1 second
• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default
setting.
u Push MENU (C) to exit the “TONE” screen.
i Communicate in the usual manner.
• The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal
containing a matching subaudible tone.
• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit signal.
• Available tone squelch frequencies (Unit: Hz)
67.0
69.3
71.9
74.4
77.0
88.5
91.5
94.8
97.4
100.0
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
151.4
156.7
159.8
162.2
165.5
177.3
179.9
183.5
186.2
189.9
203.5
206.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
79.7
82.5
85.4
103.5
107.2
110.9
136.5
141.3
146.2
167.9
171.3
173.8
192.8
196.6
199.5
229.1
233.6
241.8
Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
250.3
254.1
4-22
Tone frequency
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
DTCS operation
The DTCS function is another method of communications using selective calling. Only received signals having a matching 3-digit code will open the squelch.
DTCS icon
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select
the FM mode.
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
r Touch [TONE](D) one or more times to turn ON the
DTCS function.
• “DTCS” appears.
• Touch [TONE](D) to toggle between “TONE,” “TSQL,”
“DTCS” and OFF (icon disappears).
Touch [TONE]
for 1 second
t Touch [TONE](D) for 1 second to display the “TONE”
screen.
• “DTCS Code” appears.
y Rotate the Dial to select the desired DTCS code
number. And touch [POL](D) to select the desired
code polarity.
NN: Normal polarity is used for both transmit and
receive. (Default)
NR: Normal polarity is used for transmit, reversed
polarity is used for receive.
RN: Reversed polarity is used for transmit, normal
polarity is used for receive.
RR: Reversed polarity is used for both transmit and
receive.
Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default
setting.
u Push MENU (C) to exit the “TONE” screen.
i Communicate in the usual manner.
• The tone squelch opens only when you receive a signal
containing a matching subaudible tone.
• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit signal.
• Available DTCS codes
023 054 125 165 245 274 356 445 506 627 732
025 065 131 172 246 306 364 446 516 631 734
026 071 132 174 251 311 365 452 523 632 743
031 072 134 205 252 315 371 454 526 654 754
032 073 143 212 255 325 411 455 532 662
036 074 145 223 261 331 412 462 546 664
043 114 152 225 263 332 413 464 565 703
047 115 155 226 265 343 423 465 606 712
051 116 156 243 266 346 431 466 612 723
053 122 162 244 271 351 432 503 624 731
4-23
DTCS code DTCS polarity
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Tone scan/DTCS code scan operation
To search for a repeater’s sub-audible tone frequency,
a tone scan is available.
By monitoring a repeater signal with a tone squelch or
DTCS, you can determine the tone frequency necessary to open the repeater or the squelch.
Left
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select
the FM mode.
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
r Touch [TONE](D) for 1 second to display the “TONE”
screen.
t Touch [TONE](D) one or more times to select the
tone type to be scanned.
Display
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• “Repeater Tone” for a repeater tone, “TSQL Tone” for tone
squelch or “DTCS Code” for a DTCS code, appears.
• When selecting a DTCS code to be scanned, the DTCS
code and its polarity is displayed. You can select the desired polarity by pushing [POL](D).
“NN”: Normal polarity for both transmit and receive.
“NR”: Normal polarity for transmit and reverse polarity for
receive.
“RN”: Reverse polarity for transmit and normal polarity for
receive.
“RR”: Reverse polarity for both transmit and receive.
Touch [TONE]
for 1 second
Touch [TONE] to
select the tone
type
y Touch [SCAN](D) to start the Tone or DTCS scan.
• “Repeater Tone SCAN,” “TSQL Tone SCAN” or “DTCS
Code SCAN” blinks, depending on the type you selected.
• If the squelch is open while scanning, the scan speed
decreases.
• If “Up/Down” is selected as the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” option in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the
scanning direction. (p. 147)
u When a matched tone or code is found, the scan
pauses, and the detected subaudible tone frequency
or DTCS code is set.
Touch [SCAN]
• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default
setting.
i Touch [SCAN](D) to cancel the scan.
When the tone scan or DTCS code scan is used in
the Memory or Call channel mode, the detected tone
frequency or code can be temporarily used.
To save the detected tone frequency or code setting,
you must overwrite the Memory or Call channel data.
(pp. 140, 141)
While Tone scanning in the VFO mode
4-24
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Repeater operation
A repeater receives transmitted signals and retransmits
them on a different frequency. When using a repeater,
the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive frequency by a frequency offset.
A repeater can be accessed using the duplex functionby setting the frequency shift to the same value as the
repeater’s frequency offset.
Left
Display
Center
See page 94 for details on accessing a D-STAR®
repeater.
q Touch the Memory channel indication once or twice
to select the VFO mode.
w Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
e On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select
the FM mode.
r Rotate the Dial to set the receive frequency (Repeater output frequency).
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Repeater tone icon
Duplex icon
When the Auto Repeater function is turned ON
(available in only the U.S.A. and Korea versions),
steps t and y are not necessary. (p. 67)
t Push MENU (C) one or more times to display the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu), then touch [DUP](D) one
or more times to set the offset direction.
Transmit frequency
(Repeater input frequency)
• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears.
• The transmit frequency (repeater input frequency) appears above the function menu.
• The frequency offset (amount of shift) can be set in the
“DUP Offset” item of the Function Set. (p. 163)
y Touch [TONE](D) to turn ON the repeater tone.
• “TONE” appears.
• The tone frequency can be set in the “TONE” screen.
88.5 Hz is set by default. (p. 4-25)
u Communicate in the normal way.
• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit signal.
Frequency Offset setting
The frequency offset (amount of shift) can be set in the
“DUP Offset” item of the Function Set. (p. 163)
SET (C) > Function > SPLIT/DUP > DUP Offset
Frequency offset
5.0000 MHz
If the Repeater tone frequency or the frequency offset is changed, the tone frequency or frequency offset for auto repeater function is also changed.
4-25
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Repeater operation (Continued)
D Repeater access tone frequency setting
Some repeaters require a subaudible tone to be accessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your
normal signal and must be set ﬁrst. You can select 50
tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.
Left
q In the FM mode, push MENU (C) one or more times
to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Touch [TONE](D) one or more times to turn ON the
Tone encoder function.
Display
Center
• “TONE” appears.
• Touch [TONE](D) to toggle between “TONE,” “TSQL,”
“DTCS” and OFF (icon disappears).
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Repeater tone icon
e Touch [TONE](D) for 1 second to display the “TONE”
screen.
• “Repeater Tone” appears.
r Rotate the Dial to select the desired tone squelch
frequency. See the table below.
• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default
setting.
t Push MENU (C) to exit the “TONE” screen.
y Communicate in the normal way.
Touch [TONE]
for 1 second
• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit signal.
• Selectable tone frequencies (Unit: Hz)
67.0
69.3
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
82.5
85.4
88.5
91.5
94.8
97.4
100.0
103.5
107.2
110.9
114.8
118.8
123.0
127.3
131.8
136.5
141.3
146.2
151.4
156.7
159.8
162.2
165.5
167.9
171.3
173.8
177.3
179.9
183.5
186.2
189.9
192.8
196.6
199.5
203.5
206.5
210.7
218.1
225.7
229.1
233.6
241.8
250.3
254.1
Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
4-26
Tone frequency
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Repeater operation (Continued)
D One-touch repeater function
Left
This function allows you to set the repeater operation
by holding down one switch.
Display
First, set the frequency offset as well as the repeater
access tone frequency (p. 163).
q Touch the Memory channel indication once or twice
to select the VFO mode.
w Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
e On the Mode selection screen, touch “FM” to select
the FM mode.
r Rotate the Dial to set the receive frequency (Repeater output frequency).
t Push MENU (C) one or more times to display the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu), then touch [DUP](D) for 1
second to turn ON the one touch repeater function.
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• “TONE” and “DUP–” appear.
• The repeater receive frequency appears above the function menu.
• The Split Frequency mode is automatically turned OFF, if
it is ON.
Touch [DUP] for
1 second
y Touch [DUP](D) one or more times to switch the offset direction.
• “DUP–” or “DUP+” appears.
u Communicate in the normal way.
• Subaudible tones are superimposed on your transmit signal.
Touch [DUP]
Repeater tone icon
Duplex icon
Transmit frequency
(Repeater input frequency)
4-27
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Repeater operation (Continued)
D Transmit frequency monitor check
You may be able to directly receive the other party’s
transmitted signal without having to go through a repeater. This function helps you to check whether direct
communication can be made, or not.
Hold down
XFC
➥ While receiving, hold down XFC (R) to see if you
can directly receive the other party’s transmitted signal.
• While holding down XFC (R), the duplex direction and
frequency offset are displayed above the function menu.
Left
Display
• While hold down XFC
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
Center
Displays the
transmit frequency
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Duplex direction and frequency offset
D 1750 Hz tone burst
A 1750 Hz tone is required to access most European
repeaters.
• While hold down [PTT]
q In the FM mode, push MENU (C) one or more times
to select the “M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
w Push [PTT] on the microphone to transmit, and then
touch [TONE](D) during repeater access.
• “1750Hz TONE” appers.
e Communicate in the normal way.
Popup window appears
4-28
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Repeater operation (Continued)
D Turning ON the Auto Repeater function
(U.S.A. and Korea versions only)
When the operating frequency falls within the repeater
output frequency range, the Auto Repeater function automatically sets the repeater settings (duplex ON/OFF,
duplex direction, tone encoder ON/OFF).
Push SET
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Auto Repeater” item of the “Function” Set
mode.
Function > SPLIT/DUP > Auto Repeater
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the desired option to turn ON the Auto Repeater function.
Touch “Function”
U.S.A. version:
• “ON–1” Activates duplex only.
• “ON–2” Activates duplex and tone.
• “OFF” Auto repeater function is turned OFF.
Korea version:
• “ON” Activates duplex and tone.
• “OFF” Auto repeater function is turned OFF.
r Push
SET (C)
to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“SPLIT/DUP”
Left
Display
Center
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
Touch “Auto Repeater”
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Touch the option
Example: ON
4-29
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Repeater operation (Continued)
D Storing a non standard repeater
q Turn OFF the Auto Repeater function in the “Function” Set mode. (p. 4-28)
SET (C) > Function > SPLIT/DUP > Auto Repeater
w While the “M-1” menu is selected, touch [A/B](D) to
select VFO A.
e Rotate the Dial to set the repeater output frequency.
r Touch [A/B](D) to select VFO B.
t Rotate the Dial to set the repeater input frequency.
y Push MENU (C) to display the “M-2” screen (M-2
menu), then touch [TONE](D) to turn ON the previously set tone encoder.
u Push MENU (C) to display the “M-1” screen (M-1
menu), then touch [A/B](D) to select VFO A.
i Touch [SPLIT](D) to turn ON the Split function.
o Rotate [M-CH](L) to select the desired memory
channel.
VFO A
Touch [A/B]
“M-1” menu
VFO B
• “BLANK” appears when a blank channel is selected.
• Rotate [BANK](L) to select the desired bank, if needed.
Push MENU (C)
!0 Touch [MW](D) for 1 second to store the set contents into the selected memory channel.
Touch [TONE]
“M-2” menu
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Push MENU (C)
Touch [A/B]
Center
“M-1” menu
Touch [SPLIT]
Split icon
Touch [MW] for
1 second
4-30
Previous view
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only)
Operation on the 5 MHz frequency band is allowed on
5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the following:
• The USB, USB Data, CW and PSK modes
• Maximum of 100 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)
• 2.8 kHz bandwidth (maximum)
• For the USB mode
The FCC speciﬁes center frequencies on the 5 MHz frequency band. However, the transceiver displays carrier
frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to 1.5 kHz
below the speciﬁed FCC channel center frequency.
It is your responsibility to set all controls so that transmission in this frequency band meets the stringent conditions under which amateur operations may use these
frequencies.
NOTE: We recommend that you store these frequencies, modes and ﬁlter settings into memory channels, for easy recall.
Transceiver Displayed
Frequency
FCC Channel
Center Frequency
5.33050 MHz
5.34650 MHz
5.35700 MHz
5.37150 MHz
5.40350 MHz
5.33200 MHz
5.34800 MHz
5.35850 MHz
5.37300 MHz
5.40500 MHz
• For the CW mode
The transceiver displays the center frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to the speciﬁed FCC channel
frequency when you operate in the CW mode.
To assist you in operating within the rules speciﬁed by the
FCC, transmission is illegal on any frequencies other than
the ﬁve shown in the tables at the right.
4-32
Transceiver Displayed
Frequency
FCC Channel
Center Frequency
5.33200 MHz
5.34800 MHz
5.35850 MHz
5.37300 MHz
5.40500 MHz
5.33200 MHz
5.34800 MHz
5.35850 MHz
5.37300 MHz
5.40500 MHz
Previous view
Section 5
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Preamp and attenuator ...........................................................5-2
D Preampliﬁer .............................................................................5-2
D Attenuator ................................................................................5-2
AGC function............................................................................5-3
D AGC speed selection...............................................................5-3
D Setting the AGC time constant ................................................5-3
RIT function..............................................................................5-4
Twin PBT operation .................................................................5-5
IF ﬁlter selection ......................................................................5-6
D IF ﬁlter selection ......................................................................5-6
D Filter passband width setting ...................................................5-6
IF (DSP) ﬁlter shape ................................................................5-7
Noise Blanker...........................................................................5-8
D NB Set mode ...........................................................................5-8
Noise Reduction ......................................................................5-9
Notch function .........................................................................5-10
D Auto Notch function .................................................................5-10
D Manual Notch function.............................................................5-11
Lock function ...........................................................................5-12
D Selecting the Lock type ...........................................................5-12
Meter peak hold function ........................................................5-13
Simple Band Scope .................................................................5-14
5-1
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Preamp and attenuator
D Preampliﬁer
The preampliﬁer ampliﬁes weak signals in the receiver
front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity.
Turn ON this function when receiving weak signals.
(Frequency band: HF/50 MHz)
➥ Push P.AMP ATT (C) one or more times to set the preamp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
• Either “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” is displayed when the preamp 1 or preamp 2 is ON.
• No icon is displayed when the preampliﬁer is OFF.
P.AMP1
P.AMP2
P.AMP ATT
✔ About the “P.AMP2” preampliﬁer
Preamp 2 is a high gain receive ampliﬁer. When it is
used in the presence of strong electromagnetic ﬁelds,
distortion sometimes results. In such cases, use either the “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP OFF” setting.
Wide dynamic range preampliﬁer. It is most
effective for the 1.8 to 21 MHz bands.
High-gain preampliﬁer. It is most effective
for the 24 to 50 MHz bands.
(Frequency band: 144/430 MHz)
➥ Push P.AMP ATT (C) turn the Preampliﬁer ON or OFF.
Preamp 2 is most effective when:
• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are
weak.
• Receive sensitivity is insufﬁcient when using lowgain antennas, or while using a narrow band antenna (such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a
short Yagi antenna).
• “P.AMP” appears when the preampliﬁer is ON.
• No icon is displayed when it’s OFF.
D Attenuator
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being
distorted when very strong signals are near the signal’s
frequency, or when very strong electromagnetic ﬁelds,
such as from broadcast stations are near your location.
These can both be independently set for each band.
➥ Hold down
Attenuator.
P.AMP ATT (C)
for 1 second to turn ON the
• “ATT” appears on the display when the Attenuator is ON.
➥ Push
P.AMP ATT (C)
P.AMP ATT
to turn it OFF.
About the Preampliﬁer and Attenuator switching procedure
Push or hold down P.AMP ATT (C) to switch the Preampliﬁer and Attenuator, as shown below.
• HF/50 MHz frequency bands
P.AMP
OFF
P.AMP1
ON
P.AMP2
ON
Hold down P.AMP ATT
ATT ON
Push P.AMP ATT
Push P.AMP ATT
• 144/430 MHz frequency bands
P.AMP
OFF
P.AMP
ON
Hold down P.AMP ATT
ATT ON
Push P.AMP ATT
Push P.AMP ATT
5-2
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
AGC function
The AGC (Auto Gain Control) controls receiver gain to
produce a constant audio output level, even when the
received signal strength greatly varies.
The transceiver has 3 pre-set AGC time constants: fast,
mid and slow for SSB, CW, RTTY and AM modes.
Left
In the FM , WFM and DV modes, the AGC time constant is ﬁxed as “FAST” (0.1 second).
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
D AGC speed selection
q On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB,
CW, RTTY or AM mode. (p.3-??)
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
e Touch [AGC](D) to select AGC-F (FAST), AGC-M
(MID) or AGC-S (SLOW).
“AGC OFF” appears when the selected AGC speed’s
time constant is set to OFF.
D Setting the AGC time constant
q On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB,
CW, RTTY or AM mode. (p.3-??)
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
e Touch [AGC](D) for 1 second to display the “AGC”
screen.
r Touch either [FAST], [MID] or [SLOW](D) to select
the desired AGC speed to be set.
Touch [AGC] for
1 second
• The selected AGC speed’s time constant is highlighted.
t Rotate the Dial to set the selected time constant.
• When AGC-M (MID) is selected
• AGC time constant can be set to between 0.1 to 8.0 seconds, (depending on the mode) or turned OFF.
• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the
default setting for the selected time constant.
Selected mode
y If desired, select another mode (any other than FM,
WFM or DV), then repeat steps e and r.
u Push MENU (C) to exit the “AGC” screen.
• Selectable AGC time constant
Mode
Default
0.3 (FAST)
SSB
2.0 (MID)
6.0 (SLOW)
0.1 (FAST)
CW/RTTY
0.5 (MID)
1.2 (SLOW)
3.0 (FAST)
AM
5.0 (MID)
7.0 (SLOW)
FM/WFM/DV 0.1 (FAST)
Selected AGC speed’s time constant display
• When AGC-F (FAST) is selected
(unit: seconds)
Selectable AGC time constant
• When AGC-S (SLOW) is selected
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
For your information
When you are receiving a weak signal, and a strong
signal is momentarily received, the AGC function
quickly reduces the receiver gain. When that signal
disappears, the transceiver may not receive the weak
signal because of the AGC action. In that case, hold
down [AGC](D) for 1 second, and rotate the Dial to
set the time constant to OFF.
OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0
Fixed
5-3
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
RIT function
The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function compensates for slight frequency differences between the two
stations.
The function shifts the receive frequency up to
±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps*, without changing the transmit frequency.
*The [M-CH] (L) control tunes in 1 Hz steps when
the operating frequency readout is set to the 1 Hz step
readout.
q Push
RIT (L)
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
RIT LED lights orange
to turn ON the RIT function.
• “RIT” and the frequency shift appear when this function is
ON.
w Rotate the [M-CH]
(L) control.
[M-CH]
[CLR]
• When the [M-CH] (L) control acts as the RIT control,
the RIT LED lights orange.
If the RIT LED is OFF, push the [M-CH] (L) switch one
or more times to turn it ON.
• Pushing the [M-CH] (L) switch to select the action of
the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls as the Memory/Bank
selection, PBT control or RIT control.
- When the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls act as the PBT
control, the PBT LED lights green.
- When the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls act as the RIT
control, the RIT LED lights orange. (The RIT control is
the inner control. The outer control is disabled.)
- When the [M-CH/BANK] (L) controls act as the Memory/Bank selection, both LEDs are OFF.
• Hold down [CLR] (L) for 1 second to reset the RIT
frequency.
• Hold down RIT (L) for 1 second to add the frequency
shift to the operating frequency.
e To cancel the RIT function, push
RIT (L)
RIT
PBT LED lights green
RIT frequency display
again.
• “RIT” and the frequency shift disappear.
5-4
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Twin PBT operation
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
To reject interference, PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting the IF
frequency slightly outside of the IF ﬁlter passband. The
IC-7100 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving both
TWIN-PBT ([M-CH/BANK] (L)) controls shifts the IF
passband center frequency both above and below the
received frequency.
➥ The LCD graphically shows the passband width and
frequency shift.
➥ Touch the Filter icon for 1 second to display the “FILTER” screen. The current passband width and frequency shift are displayed.
➥ Hold down [CLR] (L) for 1 second to set the IF
frequency to the center position.
Passband width and shift value are displayed while the TWIN PBT is used.
Appear when passband is shifted.
• “FILTER” screen display
• The “dots” disappear.
The PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB/CW/
RTTY modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode.
When adjusting, the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps
in the SSB/CW/RTTY modes, and 100 Hz in the AM
mode.
Shows the selected ﬁlter and passband width.
• While adjusting the PBT setting
• The TWIN-PBT controls should normally be set to
the center positions when there is no interference.
The PBT setting should be cleared.
• When the PBT is used, the audio tone may
change.
• The controls do not function in the FM, WFM and
DV modes.
• While rotating the TWIN-PBT ([M-CH/BANK] (L))
controls, noise may occur. This comes from the
DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction.
• Pushing [M-CH]] (L) displays the ﬁlter passband
width and shift value for 1 second.
A dot appears when the passband is shifted.
• About Passband width and Shift value
on the screen
BW : Passband width
(Width of () in which
the two PBTs overlap)
IF center
frequency
Passband’s
center frequency
SFT : Shift value
PBT OPERATION EXAMPLE
Both controls in the
center positions
PBT2
Cutting the lower
passband edge
PBT2
PBT1
Cutting both lower and
higher passband edges
PBT2
PBT1
PBT1
Passband
IF center frequency
Interference
Desired signal
5-5
Interference
Passband
Desired signal
Interference
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
IF ﬁlter selection
The transceiver has 3 passband width IF ﬁlters for each
mode.
Left
Display
The ﬁlter selection is automatically memorized in
each mode.
The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memorized in each ﬁlter.
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
D IF ﬁlter selection
q On the Mode selection screen, select the desired
mode. (p. 3-??)
w Touch the Filter icon one or more times to select IF
ﬁlter 1, 2 or 3.
When FILTER2 or FILTER3 is selected in the FM
mode, the TX modulation changes to the narrow FM
mode (2.5 kHz).
• The selected passband width and ﬁlter number is displayed as the Filter icon.
D Filter passband width setting
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
q On the Mode selection screen, select the desired
mode. (p.3-??)
Filter icon
• Passband widths for FM, WFM and DV modes are ﬁxed,
and cannot be adjusted.
w Touch the Filter icon for 1 second to display the “FILTER” screen to adjust the ﬁlter passband width.
e Touch the Filter icon one or more times to select IF
ﬁlter 1, 2 or 3.
r Touch [BW](D), then rotate the Dial to adjust the desired passband width. Then touch [BW](D) to set it.
Passband width and shift value
• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the
default setting.
t If desired, select another mode (any other than the
FM, WFM or DV), then repeat steps w and r.
y Push MENU (C) to exit the “FILTER” screen.
Mode
IF ﬁlter
• “FILTER” screen display
Touch [BW]
Adjustable range (steps)
FILTER1 (3.0 kHz)
SSB
FILTER2 (2.4 kHz)
FILTER3 (1.8 kHz)
50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)
600 Hz to 3.6 kHz (100 Hz)
• While adjusting the passband width
Rotate the Dial to
adjust the passband width, and
then touch [BW]
FILTER1 (1.2 kHz)
SSB-D
CW
FILTER2 (500 Hz)
FILTER3 (250 Hz)
50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)
600 to 3600 Hz (100 Hz)
Blinks
FILTER1 (2.4 kHz)
RTTY
FILTER2 (500 Hz)
FILTER3 (250 Hz)
FILTER1 (9.0 kHz)
AM
AM-D
FILTER3 (3.0 kHz)
This “FIL” screen (Filter) graphically displays the PBT
shift frequencies and passband width.
FILTER1 (15 kHz)
FILTER3 (7.0 kHz)
WFM
FILTER (280 kHz)
FILTER2 (10 kHz)
Highlighted
The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the
passband width is changed.
FILTER2 (6.0 kHz) 200 Hz to 10 kHz (200 Hz)
FM
FM-D
DV
Highlighted
50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)
600 to 2700 Hz (100 Hz)
Fixed
Fixed
5-6
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
IF (DSP) ﬁlter shape
(Mode: SSB/CW)
Left
Display
A soft or sharp type of DSP ﬁlter shape for both SSB
and CW can be independently selected.
q On the Mode selection screen, select the SSB or
CW mode. (p. 3-??)
w Touch the Filter icon for 1 second to display the “FILTER” screen.
e Touch [SHARP] or [SOFT](D) to select either the
soft or sharp ﬁlter shape.
r Push MENU (C) to exit the “FILTER” screen.
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
When SHARP is
selected
Touch [SHARP]
to select SOFT
When SOFT is
selected
Touch [SOFT] to
select SHARP
5-7
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Noise Blanker
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
The Noise Blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as
noise from car ignitions.
The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
➥ Push NB (D) to turn the Noise Blanker function ON
or OFF.
• “NB” is displayed when the Noise Blanker is ON.
When using the Noise Blanker function, received
signals may be distorted if they are excessively
strong or when the function is used for noise other
than pulses. In this case, set the Noise Blanker
threshold level to a shallow position, or turn OFF the
function. (See below.)
NB
NB icon
D NB Set mode
To deal with various types of noise, the attenuation
level and noise blanking duration can be set in the NB
set mode.
q Hold down NB (C) for 1 second to display the “NB”
screen (Noise blanker).
w Touch [Y] or [Z](D) to select the desired item.
e Rotate the Dial to select the desired option.
• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the
default setting.
r Push
NB
(C) to return to the previous screen.
Select the item
1. NB Level
(Default: 50%)
Set the noise blanker threshold level to between 0%
and 100%.
2. NB Depth
(Default: 8)
Set the noise attenuation level to between 1 and 10.
3. NB Width
(Default: 50)
Set the blanking duration to between 1 and 100.
5-8
Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Noise Reduction
The Noise Reduction function reduces random noise
components and enhances audio signals which are
buried in noise. The received signals are converted to
digital signals and then the audio signals are separated
from the noise.
q Push
NR (C)
Left
Display
to turn ON the Noise Reduction.
• “NR” appears.
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
w Hold down NR (C) for 1 second to display the “NR”
screen (Noise Reduction).
e Rotate the Dial to adjust the Noise Reduction level; rotate it clockwise to increase reduction level or
counterclockwise to decrease reduction level.
• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the
default setting.
• The adjustable reduction level is between 1 and 15.
r Push
tion).
NR (C)
to exit the “NR” screen (Noise Reduc-
• If desired, push NR (C) to turn OFF the Noise Reduction.
NR
NR icon
A large rotation of the “NR control” results in audio
signal masking or distortion. Set the “NR control” for
maximum readability.
Noise reduction OFF
Noise components
Noise reduction ON
Desired
signal (CW)
Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
5-9
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Notch function
(Mode = Auto notch: SSB/AM/FM
Manual notch: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
This transceiver has Auto and Manual Notch functions.
Left
Display
➥ In the SSB or AM mode, push NOTCH (C) to toggle
the Notch function between auto, manual and OFF.
• Either the Auto or Manual notch function can be turned
OFF in the “[NOTCH] switch (SSB)” or “[NOTCH] switch
(AM)” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 165)
SET (C) > Function > [NOTCH] switch (SSB)
SET (C) > Function > [NOTCH] switch (AM)
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
➥ In the CW or RTTY mode, push NOTCH (C) to turn
the Manual Notch function ON or OFF.
➥ In the FM mode, push NOTCH (C) to turn the Auto
Notch function ON or OFF.
• “AN” appears when the Auto Notch function is ON.
• “MN” appears when the Manual Notch function is ON.
• No indicator appears when the notch ﬁlter is OFF.
NOTCH
D Auto Notch function
The Auto Notch function uses DSP to automatically attenuate beat tones, tuning signals, and so on, even if
their frequencies are changing.
Auto Notch is OFF
Auto Notch is ON
Desired
signal (AF)
Unwanted interference
Auto Notch icon
Desired
signal (AF)
Interference frequency
is attenuated
5-10
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Notch function (Continued)
D Manual Notch function
Left
Display
(Mode = Manual notch: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM)
The Manual Notch function allows you to manually attenuate a frequency using the ‘NOTCH control.’
q Push NOTCH (C) once or twice to turn ON the Manual Notch function.
• “MN” appears.
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
w Hold down NOTCH (C) for 1 second to display the
“NOTCH” screen.
• Touch [WIDTH](D) to select the Manual Notch ﬁlter width,
“WIDE,” “MID” or “NAR.”
e Rotate the Dial to adjust the Notch ﬁlter frequency.
• Since the Notch ﬁlter has the very sharp characteristic,
slowly rotate the Dial when adjusting a ﬁlter.
• If desired, push NOTCH (C) to exit the “NOTCH”
screen.
NOTCH
Mode
SSB
RTTY
Center frequency
Manual Notch icon
–1040 Hz to +4040 Hz
CW
CW pitch frequency –2540Hz to
CW pitch frequency +2540Hz
AM
–5060 Hz to +5100 Hz
Manual Notch is OFF
Desired
signal (AF)
Unwanted interference
Manual Notch is ON
Desired
signal (AF)
Interference frequency
is attenuated
Manual Notch ﬁlter width
While tuning the manual notch ﬁlter, noise may be
heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
indicate an equipment malfunction.
5-11
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Lock function
The IC-7100 has two kinds of lock functions; Dial Lock
and Panel Lock. The Dial Lock function locks only the
Dial, and Panel Lock function locks controller operation.
The Dial Lock function prevents frequency changes by
accidental movement of the Dial by electronically locking it. To prevent accidental frequency changes and unnecessary function access, use the Panel Lock function.
➥ Hold down
ON or OFF.
•“
SPEECH
SPEECH
Popup window
(R) to turn the Lock function
” appears when the function is ON.
NOTE: When the “[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch” item of
the “Function” Set mode is set to “LOCK/SPEECH,”
pushing [SPEECH/LOCK] turns ON the Dial Lock
function. (p. 164)
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Lock icon
Center
D Selecting the Lock type
The Lock function is set to MAIN DIAL by default. The
setting can be changed to PANEL in the “Lock Function” item of the “Function” Set mode. (p. 165)
Touch “Function”
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Lock Function” item of the “Function” Set
mode.
Function > Lock Function
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the desired option to set the Lock type.
• MAIN DIAL: Locks only the Dial operation.
• PANEL:
Locks the Dial, controls and keys.
SPEECH
(R), [PWR/AF] (L) and [RF/
SQL] (L) can be used while in the Panel
Lock function is ON.
r Push
SET (C)
Touch
“Lock Function”
to exit the Set mode.
Touch the option
Example: PANEL
5-12
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Meter peak hold function
The Meter Peak hold function is set to ON by default,
the peak level of a received signal strength or the output power is displayed for approximately 0.5 seconds.
The function can be turned OFF in the “Meter Peak
Hold” item of the “Display” Set mode. (p. 165)
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Meter Peak Hold” item of the “Display”
Set mode.
Display > Meter Peak Hold
Appears for 0.5 seconds.
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the desired option to turn ON or OFF the Meter Peak Hold function.
r Push SET (C) to exit the Set mode.
Push SET
Touch “Display”
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Touch
“Meter Peak Hold”
Center
Touch the option
Example: OFF
5-13
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE
Simple Band Scope
The Band Scope function allows you to visually check
the location and strength of signals around a speciﬁed
frequency.
The IC-7100’s Band Scope function can be used in any
operating mode and any frequency band.
Blinks when the reference frequency
is outside of the sweep range.
Band scope display Frequency display mark
INDICATOR
Sweep icon
Band scope
display
Frequency
display mark
Sweep step
display
Sweep step
display
DESCRIPTION
While the band scope is sweeping, “ ” is displayed; while stopped, “ ” is displayed.
Received audio is not heard from the speaker while the band scope is sweeping.
Displays the signal location and strength in relation to the center (displayed) frequency. Signal
strength is relative to the S-meter level, S1 to S9+30 dB, with each vertical dot in the band scope
indicators 1 to 15 dots. Between +30 dB to +60 dB are also displayed by 15 dots. Signal activity is
measured ±30 steps from the center frequency, with each step equal to the selected sweep step.
After a sweep, displays the relative position of the reference frequency. When the reference
frequency is outside of the sweep range, “ ” or “ ” blinks. After changing the frequency, touch
[RCL](D) for 1 second to automatically return to the center frequency.
Displays the selected sweep step. Steps of 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 and 25 kHz are selectable. Each dot
of the band scope display is equal to the selected sweep step.
The band scope displays the receive signal location and
strength over a speciﬁed range on either side of a selected
frequency, in either the VFO or memory modes.
q Rotate the Dial to select a frequency.
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
e Touch [SCOPE](D) for 1 second to display the
“SCOPE” screen (Band Scope).
• Automatically starts sweeping with the previously selected sweeping step.
• During a sweep, received signals cannot be heard.
Touch [SCOPE]
r Touch [STEP](D) one or more times to select the
desired sweep step.
• 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 and 25 kHz are selectable.
t Touch [ ](D) to start sweeping, then automatically stop after sweeping.
• Touch [ ](D) for 1 second to start continuous sweeping. In this case, touch [ ](D) to stop the sweeping.
• During a sweep, “ ” is displayed but received signals
cannot be heard.
• If there is a lot of signal noise, turn OFF the Preampliﬁer
to reduce the signal input level, and, if necessary, turn
ON the Attenuator to improve the readability of the band
scope.
Sweep start/stop
y Rotate the Dial to ﬁnd a signal that you wish to communicate with. If you ﬁnd the signal, communicate in
the normal way.
Sweep step selection
Sweep icon
• If you want to return to the frequency you were using
before rotating the Dial, touch [RCL](D) for 1 second.
• If the selected frequency is set outside of the sweep
range, “ ” or “ ” blinks.
NOTE:
If you select a large sweep step, a wide frequency
range can be displayed on the band scope, but some
signals may be skipped and not displayed.
u If you want to update the band conditions while receiving, repeat steps r and t.
5-14
Previous view
Section 6
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
VOX function ............................................................................6-2
D Using the VOX function ...........................................................6-2
D Adjusting the VOX function ......................................................6-2
Break-in function .....................................................................6-3
D Semi Break-in operation ..........................................................6-3
D Full Break-in operation ............................................................6-4
Speech compressor function .................................................6-5
Transmit ﬁlter width selection ................................................6-6
Monitor function ......................................................................6-7
Split frequency operation .......................................................6-8
D Direct frequency shift input ......................................................6-9
D Split Lock function ...................................................................6-10
Quick Split function.................................................................6-11
D Split frequency offset setting ...................................................6-12
Measuring SWR .......................................................................6-13
D Spot measurement ..................................................................6-13
D Plot measurement ...................................................................6-14
D SWR Graph Set mode.............................................................6-16
DTMF Memory encoder ...........................................................6-17
Programming a DTMF code ....................................................6-17
Transmitting DTMF code .........................................................6-18
Transmitting DTMF code (Direct Input) ...................................6-19
Setting DTMF transfer speed ..................................................6-20
6-1
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
VOX function
(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/DV)
The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function
switches the transceiver between transmit and receive
with your voice. This function provides hands-free operation.
D Using the VOX function
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 35)
w On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB,
AM, FM or DV mode. (p.3-??)
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
r Touch [VOX](D) to turn ON the VOX function.
• “VOX” appears.
Touch [VOX]
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
VOX icon
Center
D Adjusting the VOX function
q On the Mode selection screen, select either the SSB,
AM, FM or DV mode. (p.3-??)
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
e Touch [VOX](D) for 1 second to display the “VOX”
screen.
r Touch [Y] or [Z](D) to select the desired item.
t Rotate the Dial to select the desired option.
• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the
default setting.
y Push
MENU
Select the item Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
(C) to exit the “VOX” screen.
1. VOX Gain
3. VOX Delay
(Default: 50%)
Adjust the VOX gain to between 0% and 100%, in 1%
steps.
Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive
to your voice.
2. Anti-VOX
(Default: 0.2sec)
Set the VOX delay to between 0.0 and 2.0 seconds, for
normal pauses in speech before returning to receive.
(Default: 50%)
Adjust the ANTI-VOX gain to between 0% and 100%,
in 1% steps.
Higher values make the VOX function less sensitive to
the received audio from a speaker or headphones.
6-2
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Break-in function
(Mode: CW)
The Break-in function is used in the CW mode to automatically toggle the transceiver between transmit and
receive when keying. The IC-7100 is capable of Full
Break-in or Semi Break-in.
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
D Semi Break-in operation
During Semi Break-in operation, the transceiver immediately transmits when you key down, then returns to
receive after a preset delay time has passed after you
stop keying.
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
w On the Mode selection screen, select the CW or
CW-R mode. (p.3-??)
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
r Touch [BK-IN](D) one or more times to turn ON the
Semi Break-in function.
• “BKIN” appears.
t When the “M-3” screen (M-3 menu) is selected,
touch [BK-IN](D) for 1 second to display the “BK-IN”
screen.
y Touch [Y] or [Z](D) to select the desired item.
u Rotate the Dial to select the desired option.
Touch [BK-IN]
Semi Break-in icon
• If desired, touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the
default setting.
i Push
MENU
(C) to exit the “BK-IN” screen.
Touch [BK-IN]
for 1 second
Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
6-3
Shows break-in delay time
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Break-in function (Continued)
D Full Break-in operation
During Full Break-in operation, the transceiver transmits when you key down, then immediately returns to
receive when you release.
q On the Mode selection screen, select the CW or
CW-R mode. (p.3-??)
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
e Touch [BK-IN](D) one or more times to turn ON the
Full Break-in function.
Touch [BK-IN]
• “F-BKIN” appears.
Left
Display
Full Break-in icon
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
When using a paddle:
Adjust the keying speed while operating a paddle.
q Push SPEED/PITCH (C) to open the Key speed/CW pitch
adjustment window.
w Rotate [M-CH]
[M-CH]
(L) to adjust the Key speed.
• The adjustable key speed is between 6 and 48 wpm
(words per minute).
e Push
MENU
SPEED/PITCH
(C) to close the window.
6-4
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Speech compressor function
(Mode: SSB)
The Speech Compressor function increases average
RF output power, improving signal strength and readability.
Left
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
w On the Mode selection screen, select the USB or
LSB mode. (p.3-??)
e Before ﬁrst tuning ON the Speech compressor, adjust
the microphone gain so that the ALC meter reading
stays within the ALC zone.
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
q Push MIC/RF PWR (C) to open the MIC gain/RF
power adjustment display.
w Rotate [M-CH]
(L) to adjust the MIC gain.
Touch [COMP]
• To adjust the MIC gain, touch the TX meter to select
the ALC meter.
e Push
MENU
(C) to close the display.
Speech Compressor icon
r Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
t Touch [COMP](D) to turn ON the Speech Compressor.
• “COMP” appears.
y Touch [COMP](D) for 1 second to display the “COMP”
(Compressor) screen.
u While speaking into the microphone at your normal
voice level, rotate the Dial so that the COMP meter
reading stays within the COMP level zone (10 dB to
20 dB zone).
Touch [COMP]
for 1 second
• To adjust the COMP level, touch the TX meter to select
the COMP meter.
• If desired, touch [DEF] for 1 second to reset to the default
setting.
When the COMP meter peaks above the COMP
level zone, your transmitted voice may be distorted.
i Push MENU (C) to exit the “COMP” screen.
Touch for 1 second
to reset to default
Shows the compression level
COMP meter
COMP level zone
(10 dB to 20 dB)
6-5
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Transmit ﬁlter width selection
(Mode: SSB)
The transmit ﬁlter width for the SSB mode can be selected from Wide, Mid or Narrow. This setting can be
memorized each for the Speech Compressor ON and
OFF.
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
w On the Mode selection screen, select the USB or
LSB mode. (p.3-??)
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-2” screen (M-2 menu).
r Touch [COMP](D) to turn ON the Speech Compressor.
Push MENU
• “COMP” appears.
t Touch [TBW](D) for 1 second one or more times a
Wide, Mid or Narrow transmission passband width.
• Touch [TBW](D) to display the selected TX ﬁlter width for
approximately 1 second.
• The following ﬁlters are speciﬁed as the defaults. Each of
the ﬁlter widths can be set in the “TBW” items of the “Tone
Control” Set mode. (p. 165)
Touch [TBW] for
1 second
SET (C)
> Tone Control > TX > SSB
> TBW (WIDE), TBW (MID), TBW (NAR)
- WIDE:
- MID:
- NAR:
Left
100 Hz to 2900 Hz
300 Hz to 2700 Hz
500 Hz to 2500 Hz
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
The selected transmit ﬁlter width is
displayed for approximately 1 second.
Center
6-6
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Monitor function
The Monitor function allows you to monitor your transmit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice
characteristics while adjusting transmit parameters.
The CW sidetone functions regardless of the “Monitor”
setting.
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Monitor” item of the “Function” Set mode.
Function > Monitor
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the option to turn ON the function.
r Touch the “Monitor Level” item of the “Function” Set
mode.
Function > Monitor Level
t Rotate the Dial to adjust the monitor level.
• For the clearest audio output, adjust while holding
down [PTT] and speaking into the microphone.
Push SET
• The adjustable monitor level is between 0% (minimum
audio level) and 100% (maximum audio level).
• If desired, touch the level bar for 1 second to open the
Default set window, then select “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
y Push
SET (C)
Touch
“Function”
to exit the Set mode.
Monitor ON/OFF
Monitor level
6-7
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Split frequency operation
Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and
receive on two different frequencies. Split frequency
operation is performed using frequencies in VFO A and
VFO B.
Left
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Display
• The Split frequency operation is automatically turned OFF
when turning ON the One-touch repeater function.
The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz/
USB mode for receiving and 21.310 MHz/USB mode
for transmitting.
Center
q Set 21.290 MHz in VFO A and select the USB
mode.
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-1” screen (M-1 menu).
e Touch [SPLIT](D) to turn ON the Split function.
• The transmit frequency (VFO B) and “SPLIT” appear.
• If desired, tap [SPLIT](D) again to turn OFF the function.
Touch [SPLIT]
r Set 21.310 MHz in VFO B and select the USB mode.
The setting method has the three following ways.
(1) While holding down XFC (R) in VFO A, rotate the
Dial to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz
in VFO B, and then select the operating mode to
USB.
Split icon
• While holding down XFC (R), you can change the
frequency band and operating mode in VFO B.
• While holding down XFC (R), the transceiver receives the transmit frequency in VFO B.
(2) Touch [A/B](D) to select VFO B, rotate the Dial
to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz, and
then select the operating mode to USB.
(3) Use the Quick Split function.
Shows the transmit frequency (VFO B)
• While holding down XFC
Shows the transmit frequency (VFO B)
• The Quick Split function is much more convenient for
selecting the transmit frequency. See the next content
for details.
t Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit on
21.310 MHz.
To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push
[A/B] to exchange VFO A and VFO B.
Shows the frequency shift and direction
• After setting up
6-8
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Split frequency operation (Continued)
D Direct frequency shift input
The frequency shift can directly be entered.
q Touch the MHz digits to enter the Band selection display.
w Touch [F-INP](D) to enter the Direct input screen.
e If the Shift direction is minus, touch “• (–).”
Touch the MHz
digits.
• [SPLIT] changes to [–SPLIT], and displays the Minus setting mode.
r Touch the desired number to enter the desired frequency shift.
• –9.999 to +9.999 MHz can be set in 1 kHz steps.
t Touch [SPLIT] or [–SPLIT](D) to input the frequency
shift to the transmit frequency, and the Split function
is turned ON.
[Example]
To transmit on a 10 kHz higher frequency:
➥ Touch [1], [0] then [SPLIT].
Touch [F-INP]
To transmit on 1.025 MHz lower frequency:
➥ Touch [• (–)], [1], [0], [2], [5] then [–SPLIT].
• Direct input screen
Shows the input
digits
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Enter the Split offset
Cancel edit
Center
Minus (–) input
6-9
Delete entering
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Split frequency operation (Continued)
D Split Lock function
The Split Lock function is convenient for changing only
the transmit frequency. When the Split Lock function is
not used, accidentally releasing XFC (R) while rotating
the Dial, changes the receive frequency.
The Split Lock function is OFF by default, but can be
turned ON in the “SPLIT LOCK” item of the “Function”
Set mode. (p. 165)
Push SET
• Setting
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “SPLIT LOCK” item of the “Function” Set
mode.
Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT LOCK
Touch
“Function”
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the option to turn ON the function.
r Push SET (C) to exit the Set mode.
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Touch
“SPLIT/DUP”
Center
Touch
“SPLIT LOCK”
• Operation
q While Split frequency operation is ON, hold down
(R) for 1 second to activate the split lock
SPEECH
function.
•“
” appears.
w While holding down XFC (R), rotate the Dial to
change the transmit frequency.
SPEECH
• If you accidentally release XFC (R) while rotating the
Dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.
XFC
6-10
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Quick Split function
When you touch [SPLIT](D) for 1 second, the Split frequency operation is turned ON. The undisplayed VFO
is automatically changed according to the plus/minus
frequency shift programmed in the “SPLIT Offset” item
of the “Function” Set mode (p. 165). Or the VFOs are
equalized when 0.000 MHz (default setting) is programmed as the Split Offset (p. 165).
SET (C)
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
> Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT Offset
The Quick Split function is ON by default. For your convenience, it can be turned OFF in the “Quick SPLIT”
item of the “Function” Set mode (p. 165). In this case,
touch [SPLIT](D) for 1 second does not equalize the
VFO A and VFO B frequencies.
SET (C)
> Function > SPLIT/DUP > Quick SPLIT
Touch [SPLIT]
for 1 second
q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in
VFO A.
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-1” screen (M-1 menu).
e Touch [SPLIT](D) for 1 second.
Split icon
• Split frequency operation is turned ON.
• The transmit (VFO B) frequency is equalized to the receive (VFO A) frequency.
r While holding down XFC (R), rotate the Dial to set
the frequency offset between transmit and receive.
• When XFC (R) is released, the receive frequency is displayed.
Shows the transmit frequency (VFO B)
• While holding down XFC
Shows the transmit frequency (VFO B)
Shows the frequency shift and direction
The example shows the split offset
is set to +20 kHz (+0.020 MHz).
6-11
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Quick Split function (Continued)
D Split frequency offset setting
By setting an often-used split frequency offset in advance, you can use the Quick Split function to select split
operation at the touch of one key.
Push SET
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “SPLIT Offset” item of the “Function” Set
mode.
Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT Offset
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [Y] or [Z](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the number to enter the desired frequency
shift, and then touch [ENT](D).
Touch
“Function”
• –9.999 to +9.999 MHz can be set in 1 kHz steps.
r Push
Left
SET (C)
to exit the Set mode.
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Touch
“SPLIT/DUP”
Center
Touch
“SPLIT Offset”
Move the cursor
Select a direction
Enter
Cancel edit
Delete entering
Enter the decimal point
Move the cursor
6-12
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Measuring SWR
The IC-7100 has a built-in circuit for measuring antenna
SWR— no external equipment or special adjustments
are necessary.
Left
Display
The IC-7100 can measure SWR two ways— spot measurement and plot measurement.
D Spot measurement
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
This function is convenient to use when measuring
SWR of the antenna to install or periodic check.
q If desired, push TUNER/CALL (L) once or twice to turn
OFF the antenna tuner.
NOTE
This transceiver can measure SWR in the 144 MHz or
430 MHz bands.
Depending on the length of the connected coaxial
cable, or installation condition, the measurement may
be different from the actual SWR of the antenna in
these band.
• If the antenna tuner is connected, and your want to measure SWR of the antenna itself, perform this step.
w Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
e On the Mode selection screen, select the RTTY or
RTTY-R mode. (p.3-??)
r If necessary, adjust the RF power to more than 30 W
on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.
• If your are operating in the 144 MHz band, adjust the RF
power to more than 20 W.
• If your are operating in the 430 MHz band, adjust the RF
power to more than 15 W.
RTTY mode icon
q Push MIC/RF PWR (C) to open the MIC gain/RF
power adjustment display.
w Rotate [BANK] (L) to adjust the RF power.
e Push MENU (C) to close the display.
Before transmitting, monitor the operating frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause
interference to other stations on the same frequency.
t Touch the TX meter one or more times to select the
SWR meter.
y Hold down [PTT] on the microphone or switch ON
the external TX switch to transmit.
u Read the SWR on the SWR meter.
SWR meter
The best match is in this range.
(1.5 or less)
• If the SWR meter points 1.5 or less, the antenna is
matched .
i Release [PTT] or Switch OFF the external TX switch
to receive.
• When the measured SWR is more than 1.5:1, adjust the
antenna to match with the transceiver.
6-13
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Measuring SWR (Continued)
D Plot measurement
Plot measurement allows you to measure the SWR
over an entire band.
Shows starting
measurement
SWR measuring
step
Frequency display mark
Shows the graph bar
INDICATOR
DESCRIPTION
Measurement
start icon
Touch [ ](D) to start the measuring. While measuring, “ ” is displayed. The measured frequency is displayed by the frequency display mark, “∫,” below the graph bar. While measuring
SWR, the frequency cannot be changed. When quieting the SWR measurement, the frequency
returns to the previous frequency before starting the SWR measurement.
Graph bar
display
Each vertical dot indicates the SWR value, and horizontal bar indicates the number of measurement steps. The measurement steps can be selected the “Number of Graph Bar” item of the
“SWR GRAPH SET” screen.
SWR graph displays SWR 1 to 3 vertically, and many dots indicates the worse SWR.
(SWR is displayed 1.0=1 dot, 1.5=10 dots, 2.0=19 dots and 3.0=28 dots.)
Frequency
display mark
Displays the relative position of the measurement frequency.
SWR measuring step
Displays the selected SWR measuring step.
Set the “Measuring Step” item of the “SWR GRAPH SET” screen.
Left
Display
Center
6-14
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Measuring SWR
D Plot measurement (Continued)
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
w On the Mode selection screen, select the RTTY or
RTTY-R mode. (p.3-??)
e If necessary, adjust the RF power to more than 30 W
on the Mic gain/RF power adjustment display.
Left
• If your are operating in the 144 MHz band, adjust the RF
power to more than 20 W.
• If your are operating in the 430 MHz band, adjust the RF
power to more than 15 W.
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
q Push MIC/RF PWR (C) to open the MIC gain/RF
power adjustment display.
w Rotate [BANK]
(L) to adjust the RF power.
Push MENU
Before transmitting, monitor the operating frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause
interference to other stations on the same frequency.
r Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
t Touch [SWR](D) to display the “SWR” (SWR Graph)
screen.
y Set the center frequency for the SWR to be measured.
u If necessary, touch [SET](D) to enter the “SWR
GRAPH SET” screen to set the Number of graph bar
or Measuring step.
Touch [SWR]
• The selectable number of graph bar are 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 and
13.
• The selectable measuring steps are 10k, 50k, 100k and
500 kHz.
• Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the previous screen.
i Touch [ ](D) to start the measuring.
• A frequency marker, “∫,” appears below the left edge of
the graph bars and displays the frequency.
Touch [ ]
o Hold down [PTT] on the microphone or switch ON
the external TX switch to transmit.
• The bar graph displays the SWR.
!0 Release [PTT] or Switch OFF the external TX switch
to receive.
• The frequency marker moves to, and frequency display
changes to the next frequency to be measured.
!1 Repeat steps o and !0 to measure SWR over the
entire frequency range.
Frequency display mark
Measuring SWR
While measuring SWR, the frequency cannot be changed
The best match is in this range. (1.5 or less)
6-15
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
Measuring SWR (Continued)
D SWR Graph Set mode
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
w Touch [SWR](D) to display the “SWR” (SWR Graph)
screen.
e Touch [SET](D) to enter the “SWR GRAPH SET”
screen.
r Touch the desired item to select.
Left
• See below for details of the set items and options.
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
t Touch the desired option to change the setting.
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the
default setting.
y Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
“SWR” (SWR Graph) screen.
u Push MENU (C) to return to the “M-3” screen
(Menu 3).
Push MENU
Touch [SWR]
Number of Graph Bar
(Default: 5)
Select the number of the graph bar for the displayed
SWR Graph.
• The selectable number are 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13.
Touch [SET]
Measuring Step
Touch the item
(Default: 10k)
Select the SWR measuring step for the center frequency.
• The selectable steps are 10k, 50k, 100k and 500
kHz.
6-16
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
DTMF Memory encoder
DTMF tones are used for autopatching, controlling other equipment, and so on. The transceiver has 16 DTMF
memory channels for storage of often-used DTMF
codes sequence of up to 24 digits.
D Programming a DTMF code
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
w On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV
mode. (p.3-??)
• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
• If your are operating in the DR mode, push MENU (C)
once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).
Touch [DTMF]
r Touch [DTMF](D) to display the DTMF mode.
• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.
t Touch [EDIT](D) to display the “DTMF MEMORY”
screen.
y Touch the desired channel to select.
Touch [EDIT]
• “d0” to “d9,” “dA” to “dD,” “d½” and “d#” are selectable.
u Touch the number or character to enter the desired
DTMF code.
i After entering the DTMF codes, touch [ENT](D) to
save the channel, and return to the “DTMF MEMORY” screen.
o Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to return to the
“DTMF” screen.
Touch the channel
Example “d0”
Move the cursor
Delete a number
Left
Display
Enter
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Cancel edit
Move the cursor
Center
Touch [ENT]
6-17
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
DTMF memory encoder (Continued)
D Transmitting DTMF code
To transmit DTMF code using a DTMF send window,
program the desired code in advance.
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
w On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV
mode. (p.3-??)
• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
Touch [DTMF]
• If your are operating in the DR mode, push MENU (C)
once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).
r Touch [DTMF](D) to display the DTMF mode.
• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.
Touch [SEND]
t Touch [SEND](D) to open the DTMF send window.
y Touch the desired channel to transmit the DTMF
code.
• The transceiver automatically transmits the selected
DTMF code.
• While transmitting, touch [SEND], [EDIT] or [SET](D)
or push MENU (C), SET (C) or XFC (R), cancels the
transmission.
• After transmitting, transceiver returns to the “DTMF”
screen.
Left
Display
Touch the DTMF
channel
Example: d0
• While transmitting
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
Highlighted
while transmitting
6-18
The DTMF code scrolls to the
left edge, and disappears every
one digit when the each digit is
sent.
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
DTMF memory encoder (Continued)
D Transmitting DTMF code (Direct Input)
q Select the desired frequency band. (p. 3-5)
w On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV
mode. (p.3-??)
• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
Touch [DTMF]
• If your are operating in the DR mode, push MENU (C)
once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).
r Touch [DTMF](D) to display the DTMF mode.
• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.
t Touch [SEND](D) to open the DTMF send window.
y Touch “Direct Input” to display the “DTMF DIRECT
INPUT” screen.
u Touch the number or character to enter the desired
DTMF code.
i When all digit are set, touch [TX](D) to transmit the
code.
Touch [SEND]
Touch
“Direct Input”
• The transceiver automatically transmits the DTMF code.
• While transmitting, touch [SEND], [EDIT] or [SET](D)
or push MENU (C), SET (C) or XFC (R), cancels the
transmission.
• After transmitting, transceiver returns to the “DTMF”
screen.
Move the cursor
Delete a number
Transmit the code
Cancel edit
Move the cursor
Left
Display
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Touch [TX]
Center
• While transmitting
Highlighted
while transmitting
6-19
The DTMF code scrolls to the
left edge, and disappears every
one digit when the each digit is
sent.
Previous view
FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT
DTMF memory encoder (Continued)
D Setting DTMF transfer speed
The DTMF transfer speed can be selected.
Example: Set the DTMF transfer speed to 300 milliseconds.
q On the Mode selection screen, select the FM or DV
mode. (p.3-??)
• The DTMF encoder can be used in the FM or DV mode.
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the
“M-3” screen (M-3 menu).
• If your are operating in the DR mode, push MENU (C)
once or twice to select the “D-2” screen (D-2 menu).
e Touch [DTMF](D) to display the DTMF mode.
• The “DTMF” screen is displayed.
r Touch [SET](D) to enter the “DTMF SET” mode.
t Touch “DTMF Speed” to enter the “DTMF Speed” set
screen.
y Touch the desired option to change the setting.
Touch [DTMF]
• 100ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 100 milliseconds per code.
5 characters per second.
• 200ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 200 milliseconds per code.
2.5 characters per second.
• 300ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 300 milliseconds per code.
1.6 characters per second.
• 500ms: Transfer the DTMF tones at about 500 milliseconds per code.
1 character per second.
• If desired, touch the item for 1 second to open the Default
set window, then select the “Default” to reset to the default setting.
u Touch [](D) or push
“DTMF” screen.
Left
Display
MENU
Touch [SET]
Touch the item
(C) to return to the
Touch the option
Example: 300 ms
Right The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
6-20
Previous view
Section 7
D-STAR INTRODUCTION
“MY” (Your own call sign) programming .............................7-2
D-STAR Intoroduction ...........................................................7-5
About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode ..............................7-6
Communication Form in the DR mode ................................7-7
IMPORTANT!
• The repeater list, described in this manual, may differ from your transceiver’s preloaded contents.
• Although Japanese repeaters are used in the setting examples, the Japanese repeater node (port) letters are different from other country’s.
Be sure to add a repeater node letter as the 8th digit in the call sign ﬁeld after a repeater call sign, according to
the repeater frequency band, as shown below.
1200 MHz:A (B in Japan)
430 MHz: B (A in Japan)
144 MHz: C (no D-STAR repeaters in Japan)
7-1
Previous view
D-STAR INTRODUCTION
“MY” (Your own call sign) programming
Before starting D-STAR, the following steps are needed.
IMPORTANT! STEP 1 Entering your call sign (MY) into the transceiver.
STEP 2 Registering your call sign
(MY) to a gateway repeater.
You have completed the steps!!
You can store up to 6 “MY” call signs.
The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the part of
the controller.
Example: Enter “JA3YUA” as your own call sign into the
MY call sign memory [MY1].
L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
1. Display the My Call Sign Edit screen
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “MY Call Sign” item of the “My Station” Set
mode.
(My Station > MY Call Sign)
Touch [√]
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the desired call sign memory for 1 second.
(Example: 1:)
r Touch the “Edit” item.
• “MY CALL SIGN (MYM)” screen appears.
The memory number, selected in the step e, is displayed.
(Example: MY1)
Touch
“My Station”
Touch
“MY Call Sign”
Touch the call
sign memory
for 1 second
(Example: 1:)
Touch
“Edit”
☞ Continued on the next page
7-2
Previous view
D-STAR INTRODUCTION
“MY” (Your own call sign) programming (Continued)
2. Enter the Call Sign
Left
Display
Right
t Touch the desired block one or more times to select
the desired character or symbol.
(Example: J)
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• A to Z, 0 to 9 and / are selectable.
• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input
and Number input mode.
• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
• Touch “” to input a space.
Center
Enter “JA3YUA” into [MY1].
y Touch [](D) to move the cursor backwards, or
touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.
u Repeat steps t and y to enter your own call sign of
up to 8 characters, including spaces.
q Touch [JKL]
to enter ‘J.’
w Touch [ABC]
to enter ‘A.’
e Touch
[AB12].
(Example: First J, then A, then 3, then Y, then U, then A)
i Touch [ENT](D) to return to the “MY CALL SIGN”
screen.
Number input mode is selected.
Call sign edit screen
Move the cursor
Delete a character
r Touch [3]
to enter ‘3.’
t Touch
[AB12].
Enter
Cancel edit
Select an input mode
Move the cursor
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
Alphabet input mode is selected.
y Touch [WXYZ]
three times
to enter ‘Y.’
u Touch [TUV]
two times
to enter ‘U.’
i Touch [ABC]
to enter ‘A.’
Input a space
o Touch [ENT]
☞ Continued on the next page
7-3
Previous view
D-STAR INTRODUCTION
“MY” (Your own call sign) programming
2. Enter the Call Sign (Continued)
Left
Display
o Touch the entered call sign to set the call sign to be
used.
!0 Push SET (C) to exit the Set mode.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
✓ Convenient!
If necessary, enter a note of up to 4 characters, such as
the model of the transceiver, name, area name, and so
on, after your call sign.
Touch the
call sign
(Example:
1:JA3YUA)
q Touch [](D) one or more times until the cursor
moves to the right of the “/”.
Appears
w Repeat steps t and y on the page 7-3 to enter a
desired 4 character note.
(Example: 7100)
Touch SET
✓ Important!
To use a repeater gateway, you must register your call
sign with a gateway repeater, usually one near your
home location.
If needed, ask the gateway repeater administrator for
call sign registration instructions.
7-4
Previous view
D-STAR INTRODUCTION
D-STAR Intoroduction
• In the original D-STAR (Digital Smart Technologies for
Amateur Radio) plan, JARL envisioned a system of
repeaters grouped together into Zones.
• The D-STAR repeater enables you to call a HAM station in another area through the internet.
• The transceiver can be operated in the digital voice
mode, including low-speed data operation, for both
transmit and receive. It has a built-in GPS receiver to
transmit and receive position data.
7-5
Previous view
D-STAR INTRODUCTION
About the DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode
The DR (D-STAR Repeater) mode is one mode you can
use for D-STAR repeater operation. In this mode, you
can select the preprogrammed repeater or frequency in
“FROM” (the access repeater or simplex), and UR call
sign in “TO” (destination), as shown to the right.
Destination
(Repeater/Station)
NOTE: If the repeater, set to “FROM” (Access Repeater) has no Gateway call sign, you cannot make
a gateway call.
Access repeater
or Simplex
In the DR mode
7-6
Previous view
D-STAR INTRODUCTION
Communication Form in the DR mode
In the DR mode, the transceiver has three communication forms, as shown below.
• Local area call: To call through your local area (access) repeater.
• Gateway call: To call through your local area (access) repeater, repeater gateway and
the internet to your destination repeater or individual station’s last used
repeater, using call sign routing.
• Simplex call: To call another station not using a repeater.
Access repeater
Local area call
Hamacho
repeater
Hamacho area
Gateway call
Hirano
repeater
Sapporo
repeater
INTERNET
Hirano area
Sapporo area
Simplex call
NOTE:
• Programming the repeater list is required for DR mode operation. (pp. ??-?? to ??-??)
• Before operating in the DV mode, be sure to check whether the repeater is busy, or not. If the repeater is busy,
wait until it is clear, or ask for a “break” using a method acceptable to your local procedures.
• The transceiver has a Time-Out Timer function for digital repeater operation. The timer limits a continuous transmission to approximately 10 minutes. Warning beeps will sound approximately 30 seconds before time-out and
then again immediately before time-out.
7-7
Previous view
Section 11
MEMORY OPERATION
General description ...............................................................11-2
D Memory channel contents .....................................................11-2
Selecting a Memory channel ................................................11-3
D Selecting in the VFO mode ...................................................11-3
D Selecting in the Memory mode..............................................11-3
Selecting a Call channel .......................................................11-4
Programming a Memory channel ........................................11-5
D Programming in the VFO mode .............................................11-5
D Programming in the Memory mode .......................................11-5
D Programming the Call channels ............................................11-5
Clearing a Memory channel ..................................................11-7
Copying Memory contents ...................................................11-8
D Copying in the Memory mode ...............................................11-8
D Copying in the VFO mode .....................................................11-8
Programming a Memory name ............................................11-9
Selecting a Memory display type .........................................11-11
Memo pad function................................................................11-12
D Writing the displayed contents into the Memo pads ..............11-12
D Calling up the Memo pads.....................................................11-13
11-1
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
General description
The transceiver has a total of 495 Memory channels (99
channels in each of 5 memory banks, A to E), 6 Scan
Edge channels (3 pairs) and two Call channels (C1/C2)
each for the 144 and 430 MHz frequency bands.
The Memory mode is useful to quickly select oftenused frequencies.
While in the memory mode, all 503 Memory channels
are tunable, which means the programmed frequency
can be temporarily tuned with the Dial.
When you tune a Memory channel without storing, and
then go back to the channel again, the original stored
frequency is displayed.
In the Memory mode, touch just above MHz area on
the display, and then select the desired band. Then rotate the Dial to select the frequency to be stored.
Memory Channels
1–99 (Total of 495)
1A/1B–3A/3B
C1/C2
Descriptions
Regular Memory channels with split frequency capability.
Program Scan Edge Memory channels with only simplex capability.
Stores the Scan Edge frequencies for programmed scans.
Two Call channels (C1/C2) each for the 144 and 430 MHz frequency bands.
Call channel with split frequency capability. Instantly recalls a speciﬁed frequency.
D Memory channel contents
The following information can be programmed into
Memory channels:
• Operating frequency (p. ??-??)
• Operating mode (p. ??-??)
• IF ﬁlter number (p. ??-??)
• Split data (p. ??-??)
(Usable only on the regular Memory channels and
Call channels.)
• Memory name (p. ??-??)
• Duplex direction (DUP+ or DUP–) and frequency offset (pp. ??-??)
• Subaudible tone encoder (p. ??-??), tone squelch or
DTCS squelch ON/OFF (pp. ??-??, ??-??)
• Subaudible tone frequency (p. ??-??), tone squelch
frequency or DTCS code with polarity (p. ??-??)
• Destination call sign (p. ??-??)
• R1/R2 call signs (p. ??-??)
• Call sign squelch or Digital code squelch ON/OFF (p.
??-??)
• Digital code (p. ??-??)
NOTE:
Memory content can be erased by static electricity,
electric transients, and other causes. In addition, they
can be erased by a malfunction or during repairs.
Therefore, we recommend that you backup the memory content or save it to a SD card or to a PC.
• The SD card is not available from Icom. Purchase a
SD card to meet your needs.
• The optional CS-7100 CLONING SOFTWARE can also
be used to backup your memory data.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
11-2
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Selecting a Memory channel
D Selecting in the VFO mode
Left
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)
w Rotate [BANK](L) to select a Memory bank that
contains the channel you want to select.
e Rotate [M-CH](L) to select a Memory channel number.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• Rotate clockwise to select a higher Memory channel
number; rotate counterclockwise to select a lower Memory channel number.
• All Memory channels, including blank channels, can be
selected.
• “BLANK” appears when no information has been programmed into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)
• You can do either step r or t ﬁrst.
Center
Outer: [BANK]
Inner: [M-CH]
NOTE: When the PBT indicator lights green, or
the RIT indicator lights orange, push [M-CH](L)
to turn OFF the indicator ﬁrst, and then rotate it.
r Touch the Memory channel number indication to select the Memory mode.
• “MEMO” and the Memory channel contents appear.
Appears
Appears
While in the VFO mode
D Selecting in the Memory mode
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
w Rotate [BANK](L) to select a Memory bank that
contains the channel you want to select.
e Rotate [M-CH](L) to select a Memory channel number.
Appears
• Rotate clockwise to select a higher Memory channel
number; rotate counterclockwise to select a lower Memory channel number.
• All Memory channels, including blank channels, can be
selected.
• “BLANK” appears when no content has been programmed
into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)
• Memory channels can also be selected using the microphone [UP]/[DN] keys. In such case, the blank channels
are skipped.
While in the Memory mode
11-3
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Selecting a Call channel
Two Call channels (C1/C2) are selectable in each of the
144 and 430 MHz frequency bands.
Factory default frequencies and operating modes are
programmed into the Call channels. Change these to
suit your operating needs. (see page ??)
q Select the 144 or 430 MHz frequency band. (p. ????)
w Push TUNER/CALL (L) to select the Call channel of the
selected frequency band.
TUNER/CALL
• “CALL1” appears.
• Rotate [M-CH] to select “CALL2.”
e Push TUNER/CALL (L) again to return to the previous
screen display.
Appears
While in the Call channel mode
11-4
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Programming a Memory channel
Memory channels can be programmed in either the
VFO mode or the Memory mode.
Left
Display
NOTE: If you perform the operations as described
below in a pre-programmed channel, the previous
channel content will be overwritten.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
D Programming in the VFO mode
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)
w Set the desired contents into VFO A or VFO B.
e Rotate [BANK](L) or [M-CH](L) to select the Memory channel to be programmed.
• “BLANK” appears when no content has been programmed
into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)
r Touch [MW](D) for 1 second to program the contents into the Memory channel.
[Example]:
Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into Memory
channel 12 while in the VFO mode.
D Programming in the Memory mode
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
w Rotate [M-CH](L) to select the Memory channel to
be programmed.
• The contents of the Memory channel appear in the display.
• “BLANK” appears if the selected Memory channel is a
blank channel.
e Set the desired contents into the Memory channel.
• When a blank channel is selected, touch just above MHz
area on the display, and then select the desired band.
Rotate the Dial to select the frequency. (p. ??)
r Touch [MW](D) for 1 second to program the contents into the Memory channel.
[Example]:
Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into Memory channel 18 while in the Memory mode.
D Programming the Call channels
It is convenient to program often-used frequencies into
the Call channels for quick recall.
Appears
q Rotate [M-CH](L) to select a Call channel.
• A capital “C” appears.
w Set the desired contents into the channel.
e Touch [MW](D) for 1 second to program the contents into the Call channel.
IMPORTANT!
When a Call channel is selected by pushing TUNER/CALL
(L), you cannot change the memory contents. However, when a Call channel is selected using [M-CH]
in the VFO or Memory mode, the memory contents
can be changed.
Appears
While in the Memory mode
The 144 MHz frequency band can be programmed
into the 144 “C1” or C2,” and the 430 MHz frequency
band can be programmed into the 430 “C1” or C2.”
11-5
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Programming a Memory channel (Continued)
D Programming in the DR mode
The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the part of
the controller.
q Push DR to select the DR mode. (p. ??-??)
w Set the desired contents. (p. ??-??)
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “D2” screen.
r Touch [MW](D).
L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• The “MW” screen appears.
t Rotate [BANK](L) or [M-CH](L) to select the Memory channel to be programmed.
• “---.---.-- ------” appears when no content has been programmed into the Memory channel. (Blank channel)
y Touch [MW](D) for 1 second to program the contents into the Memory channel.
u Check the programmed contents on the Memory
mode. (p. ??-??)
DR
Set the
desired
contents.
✓ For your reference
The Memory channel contents, programmed in the DR
mode, can also be copied to the VFO. (p. ??-??)
MENU
Touch
[MW]
[BANK]/
[M-CH]
Touch
[MW] for
1 second
Blinks
[Example]:
Programming
“HIRANO43”
in “FROM”/
“HAMACH43”
in “TO” into
Memory
channel A-01.
11-6
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Programming a Memory channel (Continued)
D Checking the programmed Memory contents
Left
Display
The programmed Memory channels can be checked on
the “MEMORY LIST” screen.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q When the “M-3” (Menu 3) screen is selected, touch
[MEMO](D) to display the “MEMO” (Memory)
screen.
w Rotate [BANK](L) to select the Memory bank (A to
E) to be checked.
e Touch [LIST](D) to display the “MEMORY LIST”
screen.
Center
• Touch [∫] or [√](D) to select the displayed page.
• The Program Scan Edge Memory channels can be
checked on any band screen.
“MEMORY LIST”
screen of
Bank A.
D Checking the Memory contents programmed in the DR mode
q Push DR one or more times to cancel the DR
mode.
w Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
Access repeater
call sign
Destination call
sign
• The access repeater call sign and the destination call
sign appear.
When the “M-2” (Menu 2) screen is selected, touch
[CS](D) to display the call sign programmed in the
selected channel.
✓ For your reference
“FROM” and “TO” names are automatically programmed
as the Memory name.
• The Memory name is not overwritten when the memory contents are programmed into the preprogrammed
channel.
11-7
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Clearing a Memory channel
Left
Any no longer used regular Memory channels can be
cleared, and then become blank channels.
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
w Rotate [BANK](L) or [M-CH](L) to select the Memory channel to be cleared.
e Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M3” screen (Menu 3).
r Touch [MEMO](D).
t Touch [M-CL](D) for 1 second to clear the contents.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
• The programmed contents disappear.
• “BLANK” appears.
Touch
[MEMO].
Touch [M-CL]
for 1 second.
11-8
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Copying Memory contents
The Memory channel contents (frequency, operating
mode, and so on.) can be copied to the VFO.
Left
Display
D Copying in the Memory mode
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
w Rotate [BANK](L) or [M-CH](L) to select the Memory channel to be copied.
Center
• “BLANK” appears if the selected Memory channel is a
blank channel. In this case nothing can be copied.
e Touch [V/M](D) for 1 second to copy the Memory
channel contents into the VFO.
r Touch the Memory channel number indication to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)
D Copying in the VFO mode
➥ In the VFO mode, select the Memory channel number to be copied. And then, touch [V/M] for 1 second
to copy the Memory channel contents into the selected VFO.
Touch [V/M]
for 1 second.
• “BLANK” appears if the selected Memory channel is a
blank channel. In this case nothing can be copied.
The Memory
channel contents
are transferred into
the selected VFO.
(The display does
not change.)
Touch [V/M].
11-9
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Programming a Memory name
Left
All Memory channels, including Scan Edges and Call
channels, can be tagged with alphanumeric names of
up to 16 characters each.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
[EXAMPLE]: Programming a memory name into Memory channel 99 of Bank A.
Center
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
w Rotate [BANK] to select Bank A.
e Rotate [M-CH] to select the Memory channel 99.
r Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M3” screen (Menu 3).
t Touch [MEMO](D) to display the “MEMO” screen
(Memory Menu).
y Touch [LIST](D) to display the “MEMORY LIST”
screen.
u Push QUICK (D), and then touch [Edit Name] to enter the “MEMORY NAME” screen (Memory name
edit screen).
Touch [MEMO]
on the “M-3”
screen.
Touch [LIST]
“MEMORY LIST”
screen of
Bank A.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
• If the channel you selected is a blank channel, [Edit
Name] does not appear.
i Touch the desired block one or more times to select
the desired character or symbol.
Push QUICK
Touch
[Edit Name].
Selectable characters and symbols
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & \ ? " ’ ` ^
+ – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ ¯ @ (space)
Memory name edit screen
• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input
and Number input mode.
• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selection window.
• Touch “” to input a space.
Move the cursor
Delete a character
Select an
input mode
Enter
Cancel edit
Move the cursor
Input a space
Input mode screen
Touch [!"#] to
open the Symbol
character selection window.
☞ Continued on the next page.
11-10
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Memory name programming (Continued)
o Touch [](D) to move the cursor backwards, or
touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.
!0 Repeat steps i and o to program up to 16 characters memory name, and then touch [ENT](D) to
save the name, and return to the “MEMORY LIST”
screen.
!1 Touch [](D) to return to the “MEMO” (Memory)
screen.
After
programming, touch [ENT]
• Push MENU (C) to return to the “M-3” screen (Menu 3).
Touch [] to return
to the “MEMO”
screen.
11-11
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Selecting a Memory display type
While in the memory mode, the programmed memory
name can be displayed.
Left
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
w Push QUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu window.
e Touch [Name Display].
r Touch the desired Display type option.
• OFF: Displays only the frequency.
• ON: Displays the memory name under the frequency. (Default)
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
Push
QUICK .
Touch
[Name Display].
Touch “ON.”
The memory name
disappears.
11-12
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Memo pad function
The transceiver has a Memo pad function to store the
displayed content for easy writing and recalling. The
Memo pads are separate from the Memory channels.
The default number of Memo pads is 5. However, you
can increase the number to 10 in the “Memopad Numbers” item of the Set mode, if desired. (p. ??-??)
Memo pads are convenient when you want to memorize the displayed content temporarily, such as when
you ﬁnd a DX station in a pile-up, or when a desired
station is busy for a long time and you want to temporarily search for other stations.
Use the transceiver’s Memo pads instead of relying on
hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.
D Writing the displayed contents into the Memo pads
You can store the displayed content by pushing MPAD
(R).
When you store content of the 6th Memo pad, the oldest stored content is automatically erased, to make
room for the new content.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
NOTE: Each Memo pad must have its own unique
content; Memo pads having identical content cannot
be written.
Center
Operating frequency of the VFO
or Memory mode
Memo pads
Newest
MPAD
In this example, 21.347.24 MHz (USB) will be
erased when 21.280.00 MHz (USB) is written.
Oldest
Erased
11-13
Previous view
11
MEMORY OPERATION
Memo pad function (Continued)
D Calling up the Memo pads
When you call up a Memo pad, the previously displayed
content is automatically stored in a temporary pad. The
temporary pad can be recalled by pushing MPAD (R)
one or more times.
You can call up a Memo pad by pushing MPAD (R)
one or more times while in either the VFO or Memory
mode.
• The Memo pad content is called up, starting from the most
recently written.
• You may think there are 6 Memo pads because 6 different
frequencies (5 are in Memo pads and 1 is in the temporary
pad) are called up by MPAD (R).
If you change the contents called up from a Memo
pad, the stored temporary pad content is replaced
with the changed content.
Operating frequency of the VFO
or Memory mode
Memo pads
Newest
MPAD
MPAD
Oldest
11-14
Previous view
Section 12
SCAN OPERATION
Scan types..............................................................................12-2
Preparation.............................................................................12-3
Scan Set mode .......................................................................12-4
Voice Squelch Control function ...........................................12-6
Scan edge programming ......................................................12-7
Programmed scan (VFO mode) ............................................12-8
Fine programmed scan (VFO mode) ....................................12-9
Memory scan (Memory mode) ..............................................12-10
Memory scan.........................................................................12-10
Mode Select scan ..................................................................12-11
Select Memory scan..............................................................12-12
Setting/Cancelling Select Memory channels .........................12-13
∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO mode/Memory mode) .....12-14
D About the ∂F scan ................................................................12-14
D About the Fine ∂F scan ........................................................12-15
VFO frequency and a priority channel.................................12-16
DR mode and a priority channel ..........................................12-17
12-1
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Scan types
Scanning automatically searches for signals and makes
it easier to locate new stations for contact or listening
purposes. The IC-7100 has several scan types; Programmed scan, Memory scan, Select Memory scan,
Mode Select scan and ∂F (Delta Frequency) scan.
Rotating the Dial changes the scanning direction as the
default. The Dial functions during a scan can be set in
the Scan Set mode. (p. ??-??)
PROGRAMMED SCAN (p. ??-??)
Repeatedly scans between scan edges. P1 scans
between 1A and 1B, P2 scans between 2A and 2B,
and P3 scans between 3A and 3B frequencies.
This scan operates in the VFO mode.
MEMORY SCAN (p. ??-??)
Repeatedly scans all programmed Memory channels.
This scan operates in the Memory mode.
1A
2A
3A
1B
2B
3B
Scan edges
★ Mch 3
Mch 2
★ means the Select Memory channels.
★Mch 1
Scan
Mch 4
★Mch 99
★Mch 7
★ Mch 5
Mch 6
Jump
MODE SELECT SCAN (p. ??-??)
Repeatedly scans all selected Memory mode channels.
This scan operates in the Memory mode.
USB
FM
SELECT MEMORY SCAN (p. ??-??)
Repeatedly scans all Select Memory channels.
This scan operates in the Memory mode.
FM
★Mch 1
FM
FM
FM
Mch 4
★ means the Select Memory channels.
★Mch 99
USB
∂F SCAN (p. ??-??)
Repeatedly scans within the ∂F span area.
This scan operates in both VFO and Memory
modes.
Center frequency
★Mch 7
★Mch 5
Mch 6
PRIORITY SCAN (p. ??-??)
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds:
• While receiving on a VFO frequency
• During a VFO mode scan for the VFO mode
• While receiving on a repeater in the DR mode
• During a DR mode scan for the DR mode
This scan operates in the VFO or DR mode.
(Start frequency)
–∂F frequency
★Mch 3
Mch 2
CW
+∂F frequency
Scan
VFO
mode
Jump
Receiving/Scan
(5 seconds)
12-2
Priority
channel
Checks every
5 seconds.
DR
mode
Priority
channel
Receiving/Scan
(5 seconds)
Checks ever
5 seconds
A Memory channel, Call
channel or Program Scan
Edge channel can be
selected as the priority
channel.
A VFO frequency, Memory channel, Call channel
or Program Scan Edge
channel can be selected
as the priority channel.
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Preparation
• Squelch status
❍ The scan starts with the squelch open
For a programmed scan:
When the tuning step is 1 kHz or less:
The scan continues until it is manually stopped— it
does not pause*, even if signals are detected.
For a Programmed scan:
Program scan edge frequencies into Program Scan
Edge channels “1A–3A” and “1B–3B.” (p. ??-??)
For a Memory scan:
Program two or more Memory channels. (Program
Scan Edge channels will not be scanned.) (p. ??-??)
* The scan is paused when the squelch is closed and then
opened. The scan resumes, or is cancelled, depending on
the Scan Resume setting.
For a Mode Select scan:
Program two or more Memory channels, all with the
same operating mode. (p. ??-??)
When the tuning step is 5 kHz or more:
If Scan Resume is ON, the scan pauses on each step
when a signal is detected, then resumes.
If the Scan Resume is OFF, the scan does not start.
For a Select Memory scan:
Program two or more Memory channels as Select
Memory channels. (p. ??-??)
For a ∂F scan:
Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) in the “SCAN” screen.
(p. ??-??)
For memory scan:
If Scan Resume is ON, the scan pauses on each channel
when a signal is detected, then resumes.
If Scan Resume is OFF, the scan does not start.
• Scan Resume function
You can set the scan to resume or cancel when detecting a signal in the Scan Set mode. The Scan Resume
function must be set before starting a scan. (p. ??-??)
❍ The scan starts with the squelch closed
The scan pauses when a signal is detected. The scan
resumes, or is cancelled, depending on the Scan Resume setting.
• Scan speed
The scan speed can be set to fast or slow in the Scan
Set mode. (p. ??-??)
• Dial function
How the Dial functions during a scan, can be set in the
Scan Set mode. (p. ??-??)
12-3
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Scan Set mode
The Scan speed, Scan Resume function, Pause Timer,
Resume Timer and the Dial function can be set in the
Scan Set mode.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M1” (Menu 1) screen.
w Touch [SCAN](D) to display the “SCAN” screen.
e Touch [SET](D) to display the “SCAN SET” screen.
r Touch the desired item.
Center
• To go back the previous tree level, touch [](D), or
MENU (C).
t Touch a desired option shown on the display.
Touch [SCAN]
• When you touch an option, it is automatically saved and
goes back the previous tree level.
• Push QUICK (C), and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting, if desired.
y Push MENU (C) to return to the “SCAN” screen.
Touch
[SET]
Touch a desired
item.
(Example:
SCAN Resume)
Touch a desired
option.
(Example: OFF)
12-4
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Scan Set mode (Continued)
SCAN Speed
Resume Timer
(Default: Fast)
Select the desired scan speed between slow and fast.
(Default: ON)
Select the scan Resume Timer.
When a received signal disappears, the scan resumes
according to this setting.
• Slow: The scan is slower.
• Fast: The scan is faster.
• 0 sec:
SCAN Resume
The scan resumes immediately after the
signal disappears.
• 1 to 5 sec: The scan resumes 1 to 5 seconds after
the signal disappears.
• Hold:
The scan remains paused according to
the Pause Timer, even if the signal disappears.
- Rotate the Dial to resume the scan.
- When “Pause Timer” is set to 2 to 20
seconds, the scan resumes, according
to the “Pause Timer” setting.
(Default: ON)
Set the Scan Resume function ON or OFF.
• OFF: When a signal is detected, the scan is cancelled.
• ON: When a signal is received during a scan, the
scan pauses for the set period of time in the
“Pause Timer” setting, and then resumes.
When the signal disappears, the scan resumes
after the set period of time in the “Resume Timer” setting.
Pause Timer
MAIN DIAL (SCAN)
(Default: Up/Down)
Select the function of the Dial while scanning.
(Default: 10 sec)
• OFF
: Rotating the Dial cancels the scan.
• Up/Down : Rotating the Dial changes the scanning
direction.
Select the scan Pause Timer.
When a signal is received, the scan pauses according
to this setting.
When the “Resume Timer” is set to “0 sec,” this setting
is invalid.
• 2 to 20 sec: When a signal disappears while pausing
the scan for 2 to 20 seconds (in 2 seconds steps), the scan resumes according to the setting in the Resume Timer.
• Hold:
When receiving a signal, the scan pauses and resumes when it disappears, according to the setting in Resume Timer.
12-5
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Voice Squelch Control function
(Mode: SSB/AM/FM)
This function is useful when you do not want unmodulated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the
Voice Squelch Control (VSC) function is ON, the receiver checks received signals for voice components.
The scan pauses, or is cancelled, if a received signal
includes voice components, and the tone of the voice
components changes within 1 second. See “Squelch
status” as described on page ??-??.
The scan resumes if the received signal includes no
voice components, or the tone of the voice components
does not change within 1 second.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
q Select SSB, AM or FM as the operating mode.
w Push QUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu window.
e Touch [VSC].
r Touch the desired option.
•“
” appears when the VSC function is ON.
• When you touch an option, it is automatically saved and
goes back the previous tree level.
QUICK
• The VSC function is usable in the phone modes
(SSB, AM and FM).
• The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodulated signals, regardless of whether the Scan Resume function is set to ON or OFF.
Touch [VSC].
Touch a desired
option.
(Example: ON)
Appears
NOTE: While listening to the radio with the VSC
function ON, the audio may be interrupted. The music or a commercial, including narration or BGM, is
not detected as an audio component. In this case,
turn OFF the VSC function.
12-6
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Scan edge programming
Memory channels 1A–3A and 1B–3B are the Program
Scan Edge channels. They are used to program the upper and lower frequency edges for programmed scans.
(p. ??-??)
Factory default frequency and operating modes are
programmed into the Scan Edge channels: 1A/1B are
for HF, 2A/2B are for the 144 MHz, and 3A/3B are for
the 430 MHz frequency bands, and you can reprogram
it as desired.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
If both upper and lower band edges are programmed
with the same frequency, a programmed scan cannot start.
EXAMPLE: Programming 14.000.00 MHz into 2A and
14.360.00 MHz into 2B.
[M-CH]
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)
w Rotate [M-CH] (L) to select scan edge 2A.
e Set 14.000.00 MHz as the lower frequency.
r Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M1” (Menu 1) screen.
t Touch [MW](D) for 1 second to program 14.000.00
MHz into scan edge 2A.
MENU
Touch [MW]
for 1 second
• Three beeps sound when the programming is complete.
y Rotate [M-CH] (L) to select scan edge 2B.
u Set 14.360.00 MHz as the upper frequency.
i Touch [MW] for 1 second to program 14.360.00 MHz
into scan edge 2B.
• Three beeps sound when the programming is complete.
o If 2A/2B is selected as the scanning range when a
programmed scan is started, it will search for signals
between 14.000.00 MHz and 14.360.00 MHz. (p. ????)
Programming 14.000.00 MHz/USB into 2A.
Programming 14.360.00 MHz/USB into 2B.
12-7
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Programmed scan (VFO mode)
Left
A programmed scan searches for signals between Program Scan Edge channels “1A–3A” and “1B–3B.”
Before starting the programmed scan, scan edges must
be programmed into these channels.
See the previous page for scan edge programming.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
If the same frequencies are programmed into the
Program Scan Edge channels, the programmed
scan will not start.
Center
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)
w Touch the mode icon to display the Mode selection
screen, and then touch the desired operating mode.
Touch [SCAN]
• The operating mode can also be changed while scanning.
Touch [PROG]
for 1 second.
e Touch the frequency ‘kHz’ area on the display for 1
second to display the Tuning step selection screen,
and then touch the desired tuning step. (p. ??-??)
• The tuning step can also be changed while scanning.
r Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M1” (Menu 1) screen.
t Touch [SCAN](D) to display the “SCAN” screen.
y Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
Touch the desired
scan
range (Example: P2)
• The scan performance differs, depending on the squelch
setting when the scan was started. See page ??-?? for
details.
• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set to “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in the SSB, CW and RTTY
modes. (pp. ??-??, ??-??)
u Touch [PROG](D) for 1 second, and then touch the
desired scan range between “P1,” “P2” and “P3.”
• The scan searches between programmed scan channels
1A–1B (P1), 2A–2B (P2) or 3A–3B (P3).
• Example: P2: 14.000.00–14.360.00
i Touch [PROG](D) to start the programmed scan.
• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and the selected scan
range display blink while scanning.
• If “Up/Down” is selected as the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” option in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the
scanning direction. (p. ??-??)
While Programmed scanning
o When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Resume
function, the VSC function or the squelch status.
!0 Push [PROG](D) to cancel the scan.
12-8
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Fine programmed scan (VFO mode)
When a signal is received during a Fine programmed
scan, the scanning tuning step is temporarily set to
10 Hz and the scan speed decreases.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Start the programmed scan.
• Follow steps q through i as described on page ??-??.
w While scanning, touch [FINE](D) to switch the scan
function between a programmed scan and a Fine
programmed scan.
e Touch [PROG](D) to cancel the scan.
Center
Touch [FINE].
While Programmed scanning
Touch [FINE].
While Fine programmed scanning
12-9
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Memory scan (Memory mode)
D Memory scan
Left
A Memory scan searches for signals through Memory
channels 1 to 99.
Blank (unprogrammed) Memory channels are skipped.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
NOTE: For a Memory scan to start, two or more
Memory channels must be programmed. (p. ??-??)
Center
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M1” (Menu 1) screen.
e Touch [SCAN](D) to display the “SCAN” screen.
r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
Touch [SCAN]
• The scan performance differs, depending on the squelch
setting when the scan was started. See page 146 for details.
• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set to “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in the SSB, CW and RTTY
modes. (pp. ??-??, ??-??)
Touch [MEMO]
t Touch [MEMO](D) to start the Memory scan.
• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and “MEMO SCAN”
blink while scanning.
• If “Up/Down” is selected as the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” option in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the
scanning direction. (p. ??)
y Touch [MEMO](D) to cancel the scan.
While Memory scanning
12-10
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued)
D Mode Select scan
Left
Repeatedly scans all Memory channels with the same
operating mode as the displayed mode.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
NOTE: For a Mode Select scan to start, two or more
Memory channels must be programmed, and their
operating mode must be the same as the displayed
mode.
Center
q Follow steps q through e as described above to
display the “SCAN” screen.
w Touch [MEMO](D) for 1 second, and then touch
“MODE-SEL” to start the Mode Select scan.
Touch [MEMO]
for 1 second
• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and “MODE-SEL
SCAN” blink while scanning.
• If “Up/Down” is selected as the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” option in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the
scanning direction. (p. ??-??)
Touch
“MODE-SEL.”
e To change the operating mode while scanning, touch
the mode icon to display the Mode selection screen,
and then touch the desired operating mode.
r Push [MEMO](D) to cancel the scan.
Touch the mode
icon, and then
touch the desired operating
mode
While Mode Select scanning
12-11
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued)
D Select Memory scan
Left
Display
The Select Memory scan searches for signals through
Memory channels speciﬁed as “” (Select).
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
NOTE: For a Select Memory scan to start, two or
more Memory channels must be designated as Select Memory channels. (See below)
Center
q Follow steps q through e as described on the page
??-?? to display the “SCAN” screen.
w Touch [MEMO](D) for 1 second, and then touch
“SEL-MEMO” to start the Select Memory scan.
Touch [MEMO]
for 1 second.
• The MHz and kHz decimal points, and “SEL–MEMO
SCAN” blink while scanning.
• If “Up/Down” is selected as the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” option in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the
scanning direction. (p. ??-??)
Touch
“SEL-MEMO.”
e Push [MEMO](D) to cancel the scan.
Appears
While Select Memory scanning
12-12
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
Memory scan (Memory mode) (Continued)
D Setting/Cancelling Select Memory channels
Left
Display
All Memory channels can be set as Select Memory channels, except for the Scan Edge and Call channels.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
➥ When the “SCAN” screen or the “MEMO” screen
(Memory Menu) is displayed, touch [SEL] to set or
cancel the displayed Memory channel as a Select
Memory channel.
Center
• “” appears when the channel is set as a Select Memory
channel.
• An error beep sounds when the displayed Memory channel is a blank channel.
• Touching [SEL] for 1 second displays “SELECT ALL
Clear?.” Touch [YES](F-4) to clear all Select Memory
channel settings.
Appears
“SCAN” screen
When the channel is set as a Select
Memory channel.
“SELECT ALL Clear?” screen
After touching [SEL] for 1 second
to clear all Select Memory channel
settings.
12-13
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO mode/Memory mode)
D About the ∂F scan
Left
∂F (Delta Frequency) scan searches for signals within
the speciﬁed range with the displayed VFO frequency
or Memory channel frequency as the center frequency.
The frequency range is speciﬁed by the width of the
selected span.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the VFO mode or Memory mode.
(p. ??-??)
w Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M1” (Menu 1) screen.
e Touch [SCAN](D) to display the “SCAN” screen.
r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
Center
Touch
[SCAN]
• The scan performance differs, depending on the squelch
setting when the scan was started. See page 146 for details.
• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set to “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in the SSB, CW and RTTY
modes. (pp. ??-??, ??-??)
Touch [SPAN] one or
more times to select
the ∂F span width.
t Touch [SPAN](D) one or more times to select the
desired ∂F span width.
Rotate the Dial
(VFO mode)
• ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz, ±500 kHz
and ±1 MHz are selectable.
y Set the center frequency of the ∂F scan.
Rotate the [M-CH]
(Memory mode)
• In the VFO mode, rotate the Dial to set the center frequency.
• In the memory mode, rotate [M-CH] (L) to select the
desired Memory channel whose frequency will be the
center frequency.
Set the center frequency
u Touch [∂F](D) to start the ∂F scan.
• “∂F SCAN,” the MHz and kHz decimal points blink while
scanning.
• If “Up/Down” is selected as the “MAIN DIAL (SCAN)” option in the Scan Set mode, rotating the Dial changes the
scanning direction. (p. ??-??)
i When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Resume function, VSC function or the squelch status.
o Touch [∂F](D) again to cancel the ∂F scan.
While ∂F scanning (VFO mode)
12-14
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan (VFO mode/Memory mode) (Continued)
D About the Fine ∂F scan
Left
When a signal is received during a Fine ∂F scan, the
scanning tuning step is temporarily set to 10 Hz and the
scan speed decreases.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Start ∂F scan.
• Follow steps q through u as described on page ??-??.
w While scanning, touch [FINE](D) to switch the scan
function between ∂F scan and Fine ∂F scan.
e Touch [∂F](D) to cancel the scan.
Center
Touch [FINE]
While ∂F scanning
Touch [FINE]
While Fine ∂F scanning
12-15
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
VFO frequency and a priority channel
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while receiving on a VFO frequency.
Left
q Touch the Memory channel number indication once
or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)
w Set the receive frequency and the operating mode.
(p. ??-??)
e Touch the Memory channel number indication to select the Memory mode. (p. ??-??)
r Rotate [BANK] or [M-CH] (L) to set the priority
channel.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
• Memory channel, Call channel or Program Scan Edge channel can be selected as the priority channel.
t Push QUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu window.
y Touch “PRIO Watch ON” to start the Priority scan.
Select the VFO
mode
• The VFO mode is automatically selected, and PRIO appears.
• To cancel the Priority scan, touch “PRIO Watch OFF” in
the Quick Menu window.
The receive frequency and the operating mode setting
Select the
Memory mode
Set the priority channel (Example: A05)
NOTE:
When the VFO mode is selected, you can normally
operate the transceiver; the operating frequency setting, the scanning operation and so on.
[BANK]/
[M-CH]
QUICK
To start the Programmed scan during the
Priority scan, touch [SCAN] in the “M-1”
(Menu 1) screen, and then touch [PROG].
Touch
“PRIO Watch ON”
When a signal is received on the priority channel
The Priority channel is automatically selected, and
PRIO blinks on the screen.
• The scan pause timer and resume settings are the same
as for a normal scan.
While Priority
scanning
Priority scan automatically pauses.
12-16
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
DR mode and a priority channel
Checks the selected priority channel every 5 seconds,
while receiving a repeater in the DR mode.
Display
Left
Right
1. Set the priority channel
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• Using the VFO frequency
q Touch the Memory channel number indication
once or twice to select the VFO mode. (p. ??-??)
w Set the receive frequency and the operating
mode. (p. ??-??)
Center
When the VFO
frequency is set
as the priority
channel
• Using the Memory/Call/Program Scan Edge
channel
q Touch the Memory channel number indication
once or twice to select the Memory mode. (p. ????)
w Rotate [BANK] or [M-CH] (L) to set the priority
channel.
The receive frequency and the operating mode setting
• Memory channel, Call channel or Program Scan Edge
channel can be selected as the priority channel.
Set the
receive
frequency
in the VFO
mode.
[BANK]/
[M-CH]
2. Select the repeater in the DR mode
q Push DR (C) to select the DR mode. (p. ??-??)
w Touch “FROM” (Access repeater), if “FROM” is
not selected.
e Rotate the Dial to select the desired repeater.
• You can select a repeater in the “FROM SELECT” screen
that is displayed after touching the repeater name on
“FROM.”
DR
Select the DR
mode
3. Start the Priority scan
q Push QUICK (D) to open the Quick Menu window.
w Touch “PRIO Watch ON” to start the Priority
scan.
Select the repeater to receive
(Example: Hirano43)
• The DR mode screen is automatically selected, and
PRIO appears.
• To cancel the Priority scan, touch “PRIO Watch OFF”
in the Quick Menu window.
Touch
“PRIO Watch ON”
Appears while
the priority
scanning
12-17
Previous view
12
SCAN OPERATION
DR mode and a priority channel (Continued)
NOTE:
When the DR mode screen is displayed, you can
normally use the DR mode; “FROM” (Access
repeater)/“TO” (Destination) selection, the DR mode
scanning and so on.
To start the DR
mode scan,
touch [SCAN]
in the “D-1”
screen.
When a signal is received on the priority channel
The Priority channel is automatically selected, and
PRIO blinks on the screen.
• The scan pause timer and resume settings are the same
as for a normal scan.
Priority scan automatically pauses.
12-18
Previous view
Section 13
USING AN SD CARD
About the SD card .................................................................13-2
Saving data onto the SD card ...............................................13-3
Inserting the SD card ............................................................13-4
D Formatting the SD card .........................................................13-4
Removing the SD card ..........................................................13-5
D Removing the SD card while the transceiver’s power is ON .13-5
Saving the setting data onto an SD card .............................13-6
Saving with a different ﬁle name ..........................................13-7
Loading the saved data ﬁles that are on the SD card ........13-8
Backing up the data stored on the SD card onto a PC ......13-10
D About the SD card’s folder contents ......................................13-10
D Making a backup ﬁle on your PC ...........................................13-11
Updating the repeater list .....................................................13-12
Cloning Transceiver-to-Transceiver using an SD card .......13-15
13-1
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
About the SD card
The SD and SDHC cards are not available from Icom.
Purchase locally.
NOTE:
• Read the instructions of the SD card thoroughly before use.
• NEVER remove the SD card, detach the battery
pack/case, or power OFF the transceiver, while
reading or writing data to or from the SD card, or
during cloning. It will cause the data to be corrupted
or damage the card.
• NEVER drop, impact or apply vibration to the SD
card. This will cause the data to be corrupted or
damage the card.
• The SD card will get warm if used continuously for a
long period of time.
• An SD card has a certain lifetime, so data reading
or writing may not be possible when using it over a
long time period.
• When reading or writing data is impossible, the SD
card’s lifetime has ended. In this case, purchase a
new one. We recommend you make a backup ﬁle of
the important data onto your PC.
• Icom will not be responsible for any damage caused
by data corruption of an SD card.
An SD card of up to 2 GB or an SDHC of up to 32 GB,
can be used with the IC-7100.
Icom has checked the compatibility with the following
SD and SDHC cards.
(As of March 2013)
Brand
SanDisk®
Type
SD
SDHC
Memory size
2 GB
4 GB
8 GB
16 GB
32 GB
• The above list does not guarantee the card’s performance.
• Through the rest of this document, the SD card and
an SDHC card are simply called SD cards.
• Icom recommends that you format all SD cards to be
used with the IC-7100, even preformatted SD cards
for PCs or other uses.
Saving the factory default data is recommended.
➥ Insert the card into the transceiver’s slot, and then
push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
Touch “SD Card,” then “Save Setting” to save.
13-2
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Saving data onto the SD card
The following data can be stored onto the card:
• Data settings of the transceiver
Memory channel contents, and repeater lists stored in
the transceiver.
• Communication contents
The transmitted and received audio.
• Communication log
The communication and receive history log.
• Automatic answering voice audio for the DV mode
Voice audio to use with the Auto Reply function in the
DV Mode.
• Voice audio for the Voice TX function
Voice audio to use with the Voice TX function.
• RTTY decode log
The transmitted or received RTTY decode history log.
13-3
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Inserting the SD card
q Turn OFF the transceiver.
w Insert the card into the slot until it locks in place, and
makes a ‘click’ sound.
Front
panel
• “ ” appears when the SD card is inserted.
• “ ” and “ ” alternately blink while accessing the SD
card.
SD card
NOTE: Before inserting, be sure to check the card
direction.
If the card is forcibly or inversely inserted, it will damage the card and/or the slot.
Terminals
facing down
Cut corner side
Appears
D Formatting the SD card
Left
Display
Right
• If you use a brand new SD card, format it, by doing
the following steps.
• Formatting a card erases all its data. Before formatting any programmed card, make a backup ﬁle
onto your PC.
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Turn OFF the transceiver, and then insert the card
into the slot.
w Turn ON the transceiver.
Center
• “ ” appears when the SD card is inserted.
e Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
r Touch the “SD Card” Set mode.
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
t Touch the “Format” item.
●
• The conﬁrmation screen “Format OK?” appears.
y Touch [YES](D).
• The formatting starts and the display shows the formatting progress.
• After formatting ends, the display automatically returns to
the screen displayed before touching [YES](D).
13-4
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Removing the SD card
q Turn OFF the power.
w Push in the SD card until a click sounds, and then
carefully pull it out.
Front
panel
Push
Pull out
D Removing the SD card while the transceiver’s power is ON
Left
Display
Right
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “SD Card” Set mode.
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the “Unmount” item.
Center
• The conﬁrmation screen “Unmount OK?” appears.
r Touch [YES](D).
• When the unmounting is completed, “Unmount is completed.” is displayed, then the display automatically returns to the screen displayed before touching [YES](D).
t Push in the SD card until a click sounds, and then
carefully pull it out.
●
13-5
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Saving the setting data onto an SD card
Memory channels, Set mode item settings, and repeater lists can be saved on the SD card.
Saving data settings on the SD card allows you to easily restore the transceiver to its previous settings, even
if an All reset is performed.
Left
Display
Right
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
✓ For your information
Data settings are saved in the “icf” ﬁle format that is
used in the CS-7100 cloning software.
The saved data on the SD card can be copied onto a
PC and edited by the cloning software.
Center
Data settings can be saved as a new ﬁle or to overwrite
an older ﬁle.
Saved as a new ﬁle
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Save Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set
mode.
(SD Card > Save Setting)
●
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch “<>.”
• The “FILE NAME” screen appears.
• The ﬁle name is automatically named in the following
manner; Setyyyymmdd_xx (yyyy: Year, mm: month, dd:
day, xx: serial number)
Example: If a second ﬁle is saved on March 1, 2013, the
ﬁle is named “Set20130301_02.”
• If you want to change the ﬁle name, see “Save with a different ﬁle name” (p. ??-??).
r Touch [ENT](D) to save the ﬁle name.
• The conﬁrmation screen “Save ﬁle?” appears.
t Touch [YES](D) to save.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
y Push
SET (C)
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
to exit the Set mode.
Overwriting a ﬁle
(Example: Overwriting the “Set20121210_01”)
➥ Select the desired ﬁle to be overwritten in step e as
described on page ??-??.
(Example: Selecting “Set20121210_01”)
13-6
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Saving with a different ﬁle name
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Save Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set
mode.
(SD Card > Save Setting)
In the
“Save Setting”
screen, touch
“<>”
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch “<>.”
• The “FILE NAME” screen appears.
r Touch [CLR](D) to delete the previously programmed
character.
• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
When the cursor does not select a character, the previous character is deleted.
If [CLR](D) is continuously touched, all the characters
are deleted.
t Touch the desired block one or more times to select
the desired character or symbol.
Selectable characters and symbols
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & \ ? " ’ ` ^
+ – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ ¯ @ (space)
• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input
and Number input mode.
• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selection window.
• Touch “” to input a space.
Touch [!"#]
to open the
Symbol character selection
window.
y Touch [](D) to move the cursor backwards, or
touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.
u Repeat steps t and y to program up to 14 characters name.
After programming,
touch
[ENT]
• Example: MY DATA
i Touch [ENT](D) to save the name.
• The conﬁrmation screen “Save ﬁle?” appears.
y Touch [YES](D) to save.
• While saving, a progress bar is displayed, then the “SD
CARD” screen is displayed after the save is completed.
u Push
Left
SET (C)
to exit the Set mode.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
13-7
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Loading the saved data ﬁles that are on the SD card
The saved memory channels, Set mode item settings
and repeater lists can be copied to the transceiver.
This function is convenient when copying the saved
data, such as memory channels, or repeater lists, to
another IC-7100 and then operating with the same
data.
To update the repeater list, click
here!
Left
Display
Saving the current data is recommended before loading other data in the transceiver.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
(Example: Loading all the data in the
“Set20130301_01” ﬁle)
Center
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Load Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set
mode.
(SD Card > Load Setting)
In the
“SD Card”
screen, touch
“Load Setting.”
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the desired ﬁle to be loaded.
(Example: Selecting “Set20130301_01”)
• The LOAD FILE screen appears.
r Touch the desired loading option, as shown below.
• ALL:
Loads all memory channels, item settings in the menu
list and the repeater list into the transceiver.
• Select:
Loads all memory channels, Set mode item settings
and the repeater list into the transceiver.
“MY call signs” and “REF Adjust” settings can be selected to be loaded.
• Repeater List Only:
Loads only the repeater list into the transceiver.
t The “Keep 'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears.
Touch [YES], [NO] or [Cancel](D).
• When [YES](D) is touched, the skip settings of the repeater list are retained. (p. ??-??)
• When [NO](D) is touched, the skip settings of the repeater list are not retained. (p. ??-??)
• When [Cancel](D) is touched, returns to the LOAD FILE
screen.
• When [YES] or [NO](D) is touched, “Load ﬁle?” appears.
☞ Continued on the next page
13-8
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Loading the saved settings ﬁle that are on the SD card (Continued)
y Touch [YES](D) to start the ﬁle check.
Left
• While checking the ﬁle, “CHECKING FILE” and a progress bar are displayed.
Display
u After checking, settings data loading begins.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are displayed.
i After loading ends, “COMPLETED!” appears.
To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.
Center
Appears only when “ALL” or “Select”*
is selected in the LOAD FILE screen,
*If “Select” is selected, only when the
“REF Adjust” check box is checked.
13-9
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Backing up the data stored on the SD card onto a PC
A backup ﬁle allows easy restoring even if the setting
data in the SD card is accidentally deleted.
w Decode
Depending on your PC, a memory card reader (purchase locally) may be additionally required to read the
SD card.
q IC-7100
e Rtty
r QsoLog
t Reply
y RxLog
D About the SD card’s folder contents
u Setting
i Voice
The folder in the SD card contains the following:
q IC-7100 folder
The folders created in the IC-7100 are contained in
this IC-7100 folder.
w Decode folder
The RTTY decode folder is created.
e RTTY folder
The transmitted or received RTTY decode data is
stored in the “txt” format.
The ﬁle format can be changed to “html” in the RTTY
DECODE LOG SET screen.
r QSO Log
QSO log data is stored in the “csv” format.
t Reply folder
Automatic reply data is stored in the “wav” format.
y RxLog
RX record log data is stored in the “csv” format.
u Setting folder
The transceiver’s setting data is stored in the “icf”
format.
i Voice folder
The recorded QSO audio date folders are created in
the Voice folder.
o yyyymmdd folder
Recorded audio ﬁle is stored in the “wav” format.
The folder name is automatically created in the following format:
yyyymmdd (yyyy:Year, mm:month, dd:day)
!0 VoiceTx
Recorded voice audio data for the Voice TX function
is stored in the “wav” format.
o yyyymmdd
o yyyymmdd
!0 VoiceTx
(Example: Selecting the setting data)
When the SD card is inserted into the SD card drive of your
PC or the SD card reader (purchase locally), the screen appears as shown below.
Click
Click
Click
The setting
data
13-10
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Backing up the data stored on the SD card onto a PC (Continued)
D Making a backup ﬁle on your PC
Windows 7 is used for these instructions.
q Insert the SD card into the SD card drive on your
PC.
• If no SD card drive is built-in, connect a memory card
reader (purchase locally) and then insert the SD card into
it.
Click
w Click the “Open folder to view ﬁles” option to access
the card.
e Select “Removal disk” and right click.
r Click “Copy.”
Click
Right click
t Open the desired folder to copy to, then right click,
then click “Paste” to copy the data that is in the SD
card onto the hard disk.
(Example: Copying into the “Backup” folder in C
drive)
Click
y When removing the SD card from your PC, click the
SD card icon in the task bar. (“ ” icon in the screen
shot as shown to the right.)
Click
• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is
connected.
u Remove the SD card from your PC when “Safe To
Remove Hardware” appears.
• The screen shot shows when a memory card reader is
connected.
13-11
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Updating the repeater list
IC-7100’s latest setting ﬁle is uploaded to
“Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals” in
the Icom website screen.
For easy operation, the repeater list is preloaded into
your transceiver.
This section describes how to manually update the repeater list using an SD card.
The latest setting ﬁle, which includes the repeater list,
can be downloaded from the Icom website.
• The displayed contents may differ.
1. Downloading the latest setting ﬁle (ICF ﬁle)
q Access the following URL to download the latest
data.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/ﬁrm/
index.html
• The latest settings ﬁle (ICF ﬁle) and repeater list (CSV;
Comma Separated Values ﬁle) are contained in the
downloaded ZIP ﬁle.
File Name: 7100_U_130301.zip
IC-7100
Depending on the
updated ﬁle date.
Cloning software(Rev. MM) and manuals
2013/3/MM
Depending on the version.
This instruction manual describes when the ﬁle name
is “7100_U_130301.zip,” for example.
w Decompress the compressed ﬁle that is downloaded
from the Icom website.
“7100_U_130301” folder will be created in the same
place where the downloaded file is saved.
PC
Transceiver
2. Inserting the SD card into a PC
e Insert the SD card into the SD card drive on your
PC.
• Icom recommends that you format all SD cards to
be used with the IC-7100, even preformatted SD
cards for PCs or other uses.
SD card
to the Card
reader
See page ?-? for details of inserting and removing
the SD card.
3. Copying the latest ICF ﬁle to the SD card
Click
r Double-click the “7100_U_130301” folder created in
the same place where the downloaded file is saved.
t Copy the ICF ﬁle (Example: “7100_USA_130301.
icf”) in the folder to the “Setting” folder in the “IC7100” folder of the SD card.
☞ Continued on the next page
Click
13-12
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Updating the repeater list (Continued)
4. Inserting the SD card
PC
y Remove the SD card from your PC, and insert the
card into the transceiver’s slot.
Transceiver
See page ??-?? for details of inserting the SD card
into the transceiver.
SD card
from the Card
reader
Saving the current data is recommended before
loading other data into the transceiver.
5. Updating the repeater list
Left
u Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
i Touch the “Load Setting” item of the “SD Card” Set
mode.
(SD Card > Load Setting)
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
o Touch the ICF ﬁle to be loaded.
(Example: Selecting “7100_USA_130301.icf”)
Center
• The LOAD FILE screen appears.
!0 Touch “Repeater List Only.”
• The “Keep 'SKIP' settings in Repeater List?” appears.
• Loads only the repeater list into the transceiver.
●
Select the ﬁle
to be loaded
☞ Continued on the next page
13-13
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Updating the repeater list (Continued)
!1 Touch [YES], [NO] or [Cancel](D).
Left
• When [YES](D) is touched, the skip settings of the repeater list are retained. (p. ??-??)
• When [NO](D) is touched, the skip settings of the repeater list are not retained. (p. ??-??)
• When [Cancel](D) is touched, returns to the LOAD FILE
screen.
• When [YES] or [NO](D) is touched, “Load ﬁle?” appears.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
!2 Touch [YES](D) to start the ﬁle check.
• While checking the ﬁle, “CHECKING FILE” and a progress bar are displayed.
!3 After checking, settings data loading begins.
• While loading, “LOADING” and a progress bar are displayed.
!4 After loading ends, “COMPLETED!” appears.
To complete the loading, reboot the transceiver.
Repeater list updating is complete!
13-14
Previous view
13
USING AN SD CARD
Cloning Transceiver-to-Transceiver using an SD card
This topic describes the cloning method using the SD
card.
Memory channel contents, Set mode item settings and
repeater list can be saved onto a SD card.
Recorded voice memories are not included in the cloning data. To play back the master transceiver’s voice
memory, insert the SD card into sub transceiver, or
make a copy onto the sub transceiver’s SD card using
a PC.
Master transceiver
Sub transceiver
SD card
Left
Display
Right
Description is with the SD card is already inserted.
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
1. Saving the master transceiver’s setting data onto
the SD card.
q Save the master transceiver’s setting data onto the
SD card, as described on page ??.
2. Remove the SD card from the master transceiver,
and then insert it to the sub transceiver.
Front
panel
w Turn OFF the master transceiver’s power.
e Remove the SD card from the master transceiver as
shown at right.
r Insert the removed SD card into the sub transceiver,
then turn ON the sub transceiver’s power.
Push
Pull out
3. Loads the setting data into the sub transceiver.
t The master transceiver’s setting data loads into the
sub transceiver, as described on page ??.
When you load the data, be sure to set the loading
content as “Repeater List Only” or “Select” in the LOAD
FILE screen, and if “Select” is selected, the “REF Adjust” check box must be cleared.
Otherwise, it may result in a frequency deviation.
LOAD FILE screen
or
LOAD OPTIOIN screen
(Appears when “Select”
is touched in the LOAD
FILE screen)
Touch “Repeater List Only” Touch “Load” without checking the “REF Adjust” box.
13-15
Previous view
Section 14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Recording a QSO audio ........................................................14-2
D To start recording ..................................................................14-2
D To stop recording ...................................................................14-2
Changing the recording mode .............................................14-3
Playing back the recorded audio .........................................14-4
Operation while playing back ...............................................14-5
Fast forward while playing .....................................................14-5
Rewind while playing .............................................................14-5
Pause while playing ...............................................................14-5
Playing the previous ﬁle.........................................................14-5
Playing the next ﬁle ...............................................................14-5
Moving to the beginning of the previous ﬁle ..........................14-5
Moving to the beginning of the next ﬁle .................................14-5
VOICE PLAYER screen’s descriptions ..................................14-5
Changing the skip time .........................................................14-6
Deleting the recorded contents (audio) ...............................14-7
Deleting the folder .................................................................14-8
Continue to record even if no signals are received ...........14-9
Record the transmit and receive audio into the same ﬁle .14-10
Start to record when the [PTT] switch is pushed ...............14-11
Viewing the folder information .............................................14-12
Viewing the ﬁle information ..................................................14-13
Viewing the SD card’s free space and recordable time .....14-15
Playing back the voice memory data on a PC ....................14-16
14-1
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Recording a QSO audio
The Voice Memory function records a QSO (communication) audio onto the SD card.
This function enables you to record both received and
transmitted audio, a QSO with a DX’pedition, and playback the recorded audio after the QSO.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
NOTE: Be sure to insert an SD card into the transceiver before recording a QSO audio.
Center
D To start recording
q Push QUICK (C) to open the Quick Menu screen.
w Touch the “<>” item to start voice recording.
• Touch [√](D) one or more times to select the desired
page.
• The transceiver displays “Recording started” and automatically exits the Quick Menu screen.
• “ ” appears while the recording is paused.
• “ ” appears and “ ” and “ ” alternately blink while recording.
• Recording is continuous until you manually stop recording, or the card becomes full.
• If the recording ﬁle’s content reaches 2GB, the transceiver automatically creates a new ﬁle, and continues recording.
QUICK
Touch
“<>”
NOTE: Once recording has started, it will continue,
even if the transceiver is rebooted.
✓ Convenient!
When the PTT Automatic Recording function is set to
ON, the recording automatically starts when [PTT] is
pushed. (p. ??-??)
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >
PTT Auto REC)
While recording
While pausing
D To stop recording
q Push QUICK (C) to open the Quick Menu screen.
w Touch “<>” to stop voice recording.
Touch
“<>”
• Touch [√](D) one or more times to select the desired
page.
• The transceiver displays “Recording stopped,” and automatically exits the Quick Menu screen.
14-2
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Changing the recording mode
You can change the recording mode in the Set mode to
record only the received audio.
The default setting is “TX&RX” (Both transmit and
receive signals are recorded).
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “REC Mode” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >
REC Mode)
SET
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
e Touch “RX Only” to save, and return to the previous
screen.
r Push SET (C) to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
Touch
“Recorder Set.”
Touch
“REC Mode.”
Touch
“RX Only.”
14-3
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Playing back the recorded audio
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Play Files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made when the recording starts.)
• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
SET
e Touch the folder that contains the ﬁle you want to
play.
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
• The ﬁle list is displayed.
• The ﬁle name is formatted yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,
m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)
r Touch the ﬁle that you want to play.
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed, and the ﬁle
starts to playback.
t Touch [](D) or push MENU (C) to stop the playback, and return to the ﬁle list screen.
Touch
“Play Files.”
Touch the folder that contains
the ﬁle you want
to play.
Touch the ﬁle
that you want
to play.
While playing back
14-4
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Operation while playing back
You can fast forward or rewind while playing back.
D Fast forward while playing
D VOICE PLAYER screen’s descriptions
Touch
to fast forward to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
If you want to change the skip time, see “Changing the
skip time.” (p. ??-??)
The VOICE PLAYER screen is shown below.
File name
Shows the playback
ﬁle name.
D Rewind while playing
File numbers
Shows the current playback
ﬁle and the total number of
ﬁles in the folder.
Touch
to rewind to the skip time point.
(Default: 10 seconds)
If you want to change the skip time, see “Changing the
skip time.” (p. ??-??)
• If you touch
within the ﬁrst second of the ﬁle, the skip
time at the end of the previously recorded ﬁle will playback.
D Pause while playing
Touch
to pause.
• While pausing,
Touch
appears.
Rewind
to resume.
Fast forward
Play the previous ﬁle
D Playing the previous ﬁle
Touch
Pause or play
to play the previous ﬁle.
• In case there are other ﬁles in the folder, while the oldest
ﬁle is playing back, touch
to start playing the beginning
of the ﬁle.
Recording information
Shows the recorded frequency, mode and audio
category.
D Playing the next ﬁle
Touch
to play the next ﬁle.
• In case there are other ﬁles in the folder, while the most recent ﬁle is playing back, touch
to stop the playback.
Progress bar
Shows the play
back progress bar.
• When the receive audio is
playing back, the audio category is displayed as “RX.”
When the transmit audio is Played back time
playing back, the audio cat- Shows the played
egory is displayed as “TX.” back time.
D Moving to the beginning of the previous
ﬁle
When the playback is paused anywhere within the ﬁle,
one or more times to return to the beginning
touch
of the ﬁle, and pause.
• Touch
Play the next ﬁle
to play it back.
When the playback is paused at beginning of a ﬁle,
to move to the beginning of the previous ﬁle,
touch
and pause.
• Touch
to play it back.
D Moving to the beginning of the next ﬁle
When the playback is paused, touch
beginning of the next ﬁle, and pause.
• Touch
Total time
Shows the ﬁle’s total
playback time.
to move to the
to play it back.
Playback mark
Appears while the audio
is playing back.
✓ Convenient!
You can fast forward or rewind the ﬁle that is playing by
rotating the Dial.
The fast forward/rewind time is one twentieth of the total ﬁle time, regardless of the skip time setting.
• The mark disappears
while fast forwarding, rewinding or pausing.
14-5
Repeater call sign/name
Shows the repeater call
sign used in the DV mode.
When the repeater name
is programmed in your
repeater list, the name is
also displayed.
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Changing the skip time
You can change the fast forward and rewind skip time
while playing.
Left
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Skip Time” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Player Set >
Skip Time)
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch the desired skip time of 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds
to save, and return to the previous screen.
r Push SET (C) to exit the Menu screen.
SET
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
Touch
“Player Set.”
Touch
“Skip Time.”
(Example)
Touch “5sec.”
14-6
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Deleting the recorded contents (audio)
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Play files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play files)
The L, R, C or D in the instructions indicate the part of
the controller.
L: Left side, R: Right side, C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made when recording starts.)
• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
e Touch the folder including the ﬁle that you want to
delete.
• The ﬁle list is displayed.
• The ﬁle name is formatted yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,
m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)
SET
r Touch the ﬁle that you want to delete for 1 second.
t Touch “Delete.”
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
• The conﬁrmation screen “Delete ﬁle?” appears.
y Touch “YES.”
• The selected ﬁle is deleted.
u Push
SET (C)
to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”

When you want to erase all audio ﬁles in the folder at
one time, select “Delete All” in step t above.
Touch
“Play ﬁles.”
Touch the folder
including the ﬁle
that you want to
delete.
Touch the ﬁle that
you want to delete
for 1 second
Touch “Delete.”
Touch “YES.”
14-7
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Deleting the folder
Left
NOTE: All the ﬁles in the folder are also deleted.
Display
Right
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Play files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play files)
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made when recording starts.)
• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
Center
e Touch the folder that you want to delete for 1 second.
r Touch “Delete.”
• The conﬁrmation screen “Delete folder?” appears.
t Touch “YES.”
• The selected folder is deleted.
y Push
SET (C)
SET
to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“Voice Memo.”

When you want to erase all folders at one time, select
“Delete All Folders” in step r.
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
Touch
“Play ﬁles.”
Touch the folder
that you want to
delete for 1 second
Touch “Delete.”
Touch “YES.”
14-8
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Continue to record even if no signals are received
In the default settings, the transceiver records audio
only while receiving signals (the squelch is open).
If you want to continue recording even if no signal is
received, do the following steps.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “RX REC Condition” item of the “Voice
Memo” Set mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >
RX REC Condition)
Center
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch “Always” to continuously record even if no signal is received.
• Always:
Recording continues, even if no signals
are received.
• Squelch Auto: The transceiver records audio only while
receiving signals (the squelch opens).
r Push
SET (C)
SET
to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
Touch
“Recorder Set.”
Touch
“RX REC Condition.”
(Example)
Touch “Always.”
14-9
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Record the transmit and receive audio into the same ﬁle
The transceiver can record the transmit and receive audio into the same ﬁle.
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “File Split” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >
File Split)
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch “OFF.”
SET
• OFF : The transceiver records the transmit and receive
audio into the same ﬁle.
• ON : The transceiver records the transmit and receive
audio into each ﬁle.
The transceiver makes separate new ﬁles for
transmit and receive audio. (Default setting)
• When you set the RX REC Condition item to
“Squelch Auto,” the transceiver records audio to
the new ﬁle when the squelch either opens or
closes.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder set >
RX REC Condition)
r Push
SET (C)
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
to exit the Set mode.
NOTE: Even if you set the “File Split” item to OFF,
when the recording ﬁle’s content becomes 2 GB, the
transceiver continues to record, but to a new ﬁle.
Touch
“Recorder Set.”
About the VOICE PLAYER screen when recording
into the same ﬁle
The VOICE PLAYER screen shows information that
is recorded ﬁrst.
When the receive audio was recorded ﬁrst, the transmit audio information is not displayed on the screen.
Touch
“File Split.”
Touch
“OFF.”
14-10
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Start to record when the [PTT] switch is pushed
The transceiver starts to record the transmitted audio
when the [PTT] switch is pushed.
After transmitting, when the transceiver receives a signal in a given amount of time, it also records the received audio. Therefore, you can record all communication audio using this function.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “PTT Auto REC” item of the “Voice Memo”
Set mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set >
PTT Auto REC)
Center
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch “ON.”
• OFF : The transceiver does not start to record when the
[PTT] switch is pushed.
• ON : The transceiver starts to record when the [PTT]
switch is pushed.
r Push
SET (C)
SET
to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
NOTE: When you set PTT AUTO REC to ON, see
the notes below.
• The transceiver also starts to record audio when
the optional microphone’s [PTT] switch is pushed,
transmitting using the VOX function or the CI-V remote controller.
• All transmit audio is recorded.
(When “RX Only” is set in the “REC Mode” item,
transmit audio is not recorded)
• When the transceiver receives a signal less than
10 seconds after transmitting, the transceiver also
records the receive audio.
• In addition, when the transceiver receives a signal,
and then receives other signals less than 10 seconds later, it records all signals audio.
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
Touch
“Recorder Set.”
Touch
“PTT Auto REC.”
Touch
“ON.”
14-11
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Viewing the folder information
The transceiver can display the folder’s name, number
of the ﬁles in the folder, total capacity of the ﬁles and
date.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Play Files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
Center
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made when recording starts.)
• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
e Touch the folder that contains the ﬁle you want to
view for 1 second.
r Touch the “Folder Information” item.
• The information screen appears.
t Touch [](C) to cancel the information screen.
SET
• Touching SET (C) or QUICK (C) also cancels.
y Push
SET (C)
to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
Touch
“Play Files.”
Touch the folder that
you want to view the
information
Touch
“Folder Information.”
Shows the information.
14-12
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Viewing the ﬁle information
The transceiver can display the recorded ﬁle’s frequency, mode, date, and so on.
Left
Display
Right
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “Play Files” item of the “Voice Memo” Set
mode.
(Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files)
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
• The folder list is displayed. (The folders are automatically
made when recording starts.)
• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (y: year, m:
month, d: day.)
Center
e Touch the folder that contains the ﬁle you want to
view.
• The ﬁle list is displayed.
• The ﬁle name is formatted yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss (y: year,
m: month, d: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second.)
r Touch the ﬁle that you want to view the information
for 1 second.
t Touch the “File Information” item.
SET
Touch
“Voice Memo.”
• The information screen appears.
y Touch [](C) to cancel the information screen.
• Touching SET (C) or QUICK (C) also cancels.
u Push
SET (C)
to exit the Set mode.
Touch
“QSO Recorder.”
Touch
“Play Files.”
Touch the folder that
contains the ﬁle you
want to view.
Touch the file that
you want to view
the information for 1
second.
Touch
“File Information.”
☞ Continued on the next page.
14-13
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Viewing the ﬁle information (Continued)
Example of ﬁle information screens (The display items differ, depending on the recording contents.)
• Transmit Information screen
(Your own position)
(Transmitting in the
DR mode)
• Receive Information screen
(Your own position)
(Receiving in the
DR mode)
14-14
(Destination position)
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Viewing the SD card’s free space and recordable time
Left
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “SD Card” item.
Display
Right
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
e Touch the “SD Card Info” item.
• The information screen appears.
r Touch [](C) to cancel the information screen.
• Touching SET (C) or QUICK (C) also cancels.
t Push
SET (C)
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
Center
to exit the Set mode.
SET
Touch
“SD Card.”
Touch
“SD Card Info.”
Shows the information screen.
14-15
Previous view
14
VOICE MEMORY FUNCTION
Playing back the voice memory data on a PC
You can also playback the voice memory data on a
PC.
However, the recorded information (frequency, date,
and so on) are not displayed.
• Mircosoft® Windows® 7 is used for the description.
PC
Transceiver
Example: Connect a memory card reader (3rd party
product) to the PC, and insert the SD card
into the reader. Then playing back the voice
memory data in the card.
• When you copy the voice memory data from the
SD card to the PC’s hard disk drive, you also
operate the same as following steps for playing
back data.
SD card
To the Card
reader
q Connect the memory card reader to the PC, and
then insert the SD card into the reader.
• If your PC has an SD card drive, insert the card into the
drive.
Click
w When the SD card is inserted in the SD card drive of
the PC or the SD card reader, the screen appears,
as shown to the right.
• The [IC-7100] folder appears.
e Double-click the [IC-7100] folder.
Double-click
r Double-click the [Voice] folder.
Double-click
t Double-click the folder in which the ﬁle you want to
playback is stored.
(Example: 20130301 folder)
y To playback the ﬁle, double-click it.
(Example: 20130301_184451.wav)
Double-click
NOTE:
• The operations while playing back may differ, depending on the software. Therefore, refer to the
software’s instruction manual for details.
• When the ﬁle does not playback, even if you double-click the ﬁle, download appropriate software
like Windows Media® Player.
Double-click
14-16
Previous view
Section 15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Recording the voice audio ....................................................15-2
Playing back the recorded voice audio ...............................15-3
Programming a memory name .............................................15-4
Transmitting the recorded voice audio................................15-6
D Adjusting the TX volume level ...............................................15-7
Voice TX Set mode .................................................................15-8
15-1
Previous view
15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Recording the voice audio
The Voice TX function transmits the recorded audio on
an SD card once, or repeatedly, for up to 10 minutes at
the speciﬁed interval.
Up to 4 memories are available for repeated CQ and
exchange transmissions in contests, as well as when
making repeated calls to DX’peditions.
The recorded audio can be transmitted in the SSB, AM
(HF/50 MHz only), FM or DV mode.
The Voice TX function can be assigned to a key on the
optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC or an external
keypad. (p. ??-??)
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
Touch
[VOICE]
NOTE: Be sure to insert an SD card into the transceiver before recording a voice audio.
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M2” (Menu 2) screen.
Push MENU
• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.
w Touch [VOICE](D) to select the Voice TX mode.
• The “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.
Touch [REC]
e Push MENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.
r Touch [REC](D) to display the “VOICE TX RECORD”
screen.
t Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4].
• The “VOICE TX RECORD (T1)” screen is displayed,
when [T1] memory is selected.
(Example)
Touch [T1]
y Touch [●](D) to start recording.
• Touch [■](D) to cancel recording.
• The maximum record time is 90 seconds.
• Hold the microphone 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) from your
mouth, then speak at a normal voice level.
• Touch [MIC GAIN](D) to display the “MIC GAIN” screen.
• If you record again on the same channel, the current contents will be overwritten.
Touch [●]
u Touch [](C) to return to the “VOICE TX RECORD”
screen.
While recording
✓ Information
To delete the recorded audio, touch the center of the
“VOICE TX RECORD (T1)”
through “VOICE TX RECORD
(T4)” screen for 1 second, or
push QUICK (C), and then
touch “Clear.”
The “MIC GAIN”
screen appears
after touching
Shows the audio input level.
15-2
Adjust so the
REC level bar
does not reach
this level.
Previous view
15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Playing back the recorded voice audio
The recorded voice audio for the Voice TX function can
be played back.
Left
Display
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M2” (Menu 2) screen.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.
w Touch [VOICE](D) to select the Voice TX mode.
• The “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.
Center
e Push MENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.
r Touch [REC](D) to display the “VOICE TX RECORD”
screen.
t Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4].
Touch
[VOICE]
• The “VOICE TX RECORD (T1)” screen is displayed,
when [T1] memory is selected.
y Touch [≈](D) to start the playback.
• Touch [■](D) to stop the playback.
Push MENU
u Touch [](C) to return to the “VOICE TX RECORD”
screen.
Touch [REC]
(Example)
Touch [T1]
Touch [≈]
While playing
15-3
Previous view
15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Programming a memory name
Each Voice TX memory, [T1] through [T4], can be programmed with an alphanumeric name of up to 16 characters.
Left
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
[EXAMPLE]: Programming the memory name “Contest” in [T1].
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M2” (Menu 2) screen.
Touch [REC]
• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.
w Touch [VOICE](D) to select the Voice TX mode.
• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.
e Push MENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.
r Touch [REC](D) to display the “VOICE TX RECORD”
screen.
t Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4], for 1
second to program.
y Touch [Edit Name] to display the “VOICE TX RECORD (T1)” screen (Voice TX name edit screen).
(Example)
Touch [T1] for
1 second.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
u Touch the desired block one or more times to select
Touch
[Edit Name].
the desired character or symbol.
Selectable characters and symbols
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, ! # $ % & \ ? " ’ ` ^
+ – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ ¯ @ (space)
Memory name edit screen
• Touch “AB12” to toggle between the Alphabet input
and Number input mode.
• Touch [CLR](D) to delete the selected character, symbol
or number.
• Touch [SYMB](D) to open the Symbol character selection window.
• Touch “” to input a space.
Move the cursor
Delete a character
Select an
input mode
Enter
Cancel edit
Move the cursor
Input a space
Input mode screen
Touch [!"#] to
open the Symbol
character selection window.
☞ Continued on the next page.
15-4
Previous view
15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Programming a memory name (Continued)
i Touch [](D) to move the cursor backwards, or
touch [](D) to move the cursor forwards.
o Repeat steps u and i to program up to 16 characters memory name, and then touch [ENT](D) to
save the name, and return to the “VOICE TX RECORD” screen.
!0 Touch [](D) to return to the “VOICE TX RECORD”
screen.
After programming,
touch [ENT]
Touch [] to cancel the “VOICE
TX
RECORD”
screen
15-5
Previous view
15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Transmitting the recorded voice audio
Left
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M2” (Menu 2) screen.
Display
• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.
w Touch [VOICE](D) to select the Voice TX mode.
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.
e Push MENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.
r <>
Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4] to
transmit the recorded voice audio once.
<>
Touch the desired memory, [T1] through [T4] for 1
second to repeatedly transmit the recorded voice
audio for up to 10 minutes at the interval specified in
“Repeat Time.”
Center
Touch
[VOICE]
• Even if 10 minutes pass while transmitting, the voice audio is completely transmitted.
• During the Voice TX waiting, the selected memory
blinks.
• One of the following steps will cancel the transmission.
- Touch the memory again.
- Turn OFF the power, then turn it ON again.
- Touch another memory (except for [LEVEL]).
- Push MENU (C), XFC (R) or SET (C).
- Push QUICK (C).
The repeat transmission is cancelled. But while transmitting, the voice audio is completely transmitted.
• Once the Repeat TX is made, the transceiver pauses
until the end of the “Repeat Time,” then transmits again.
After the second transmission, the Repeat TX continues
pausing, if receiving a signal.
But if the squelch is manually opened, the voice audio is
repeatedly transmitted, according to the repeat time setting.
Touch the
desired
memory,
Single TX
Repeat TX
Blinks while
transmitting
• Voice TX Waiting screen for <>
Blinks
15-6
Previous view
15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Transmitting the recorded voice audio (Continued)
D Adjusting the TX volume level
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M2” (Menu 2) screen.
Touch
[VOICE]
• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.
w Touch [VOICE](D) to select the Voice TX mode.
• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.
e Touch [LEVEL](D) to display the “TX LEVEL”
screen.
r Rotate the Dial to adjust the transmit voice level.
Touch
[LEVEL]
• Too high of a voice level may cause interference.
• Touch [DEF](D) for 1 second to reset to the default setting (50 %), if desired.
t Touch [LEVEL](D) to save, and exit the “TX LEVEL”
screen.
Rotate the Dial
to adjust
Reset to the Exits the “TX LEVEL”
default setting screen.
Hiding the Voice TX memory name
The voice TX memory name can be hidden on the
“VOICE TX” screen.
When “ON” is selected.
When “OFF” is selected.
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “VOICE TX Name Display” item of the
“Display” Set mode.
(Display > VOICE TX Name Display)
The voice TX memory
name is displayed.
The voice TX memory
name is not displayed.
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
e Touch “OFF.”
r Push SET (C) to exit the Menu screen.
Setting the VOICE ﬁrst menu screen
Select the first appearance screen after touching
[VOICE](D).
“M-2” (Menu 2) screen
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w Touch the “VOICE 1st menu” item of the “Function”
Set mode.
(Function > VOICE 1st menu)
After touching [VOICE].
• If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√](D)
one or more times to select the page.
When “VOICE-Root” is
selected.
e Touch the desired option.
• VOICE-Root: Displays the “VOICE” screen ﬁrst.
• VOICE-TX: Displays the “VOICE TX” screen ﬁrst.
r Push
SET (C)
When “VOICE-TX” is
selected.
to exit the Menu screen.
Displays the “VOICE”
screen ﬁrst.
15-7
Displays the “VOICE TX”
screen ﬁrst.
Previous view
15
VOICE TX FUNCTION
Voice TX Set mode
q Push MENU (C) one or more times to select the “M2” (Menu 2) screen.
• In the DR mode, select the “D1” screen.
w Touch [VOICE](D) to select the Voice TX mode.
• “VOICE TX” screen is displayed.
e Push MENU (C) to display the “VOICE” screen.
r Touch [SET](D) to display the “VOICE TX SET”
screen.
t Touch a desired item.
y Touch a desired option.
Touch
[VOICE]
• See the descriptions below for details of items and options.
• Push QUICK (C), and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting, if desired.
u Push
MENU
Push MENU
(C) to return to the “VOICE” screen.
Touch [SET]
Repeat Time
(Default: 5sec)
Set the repeat interval to between 1 and 15 seconds (in
1 second steps) for the voice repeat transmission.
The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded
voice audio at this interval.
Auto Monitor
Touch a desired item.
(Example: Repeat Time)
(Default: ON)
Turn the TX Monitor function ON or OFF.
Touch a desired option.
(Example:
7sec)
• OFF: The TX voice audio is not heard from the speaker.
• ON: The TX voice audio is heard from the speaker.
15-8
Previous view
Section 16
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Front panel ......................................................................................... 00
Front panel ......................................................................................... 00
Front panel ......................................................................................... 00
Front panel ......................................................................................... 00
16-1
Previous view
16
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Connecting the antenna tuner
The AH-4 and AT-180 AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
matches the IC-7100 to the connected antenna automatically.
Once the tuner matches an antenna, the variable capacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for
each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when
you change the frequency range, the variable capacitors are automatically preset to the memorized point.
NOTE: Before connecting, be sure to turn OFF the
transceiver’s power.
D Connecting an AH-4
The optional AH-4 matches the IC-7100 to a long
wire antenna more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and
above).
• See page ??-?? for operation.
• See the AH-4 instruction manual installation and antenna connection details.
To Long wire
To [TUNER]
IC-7200
Antenna
element
AH-4
To optional AH-2b
ANT
Ground
Ground*
To [ANT]
*Use as thick and short a wire as possible
between the AH-4 and ground.
D Connecting an AT-180
The optional AT-180 matches the IC-7100 to both HF
and 50 MHz antenna, and automatically tunes the antenna (impedance range: 16.7 to 150 ø) during transmission when the antenna SWR is less than 1.5:1.
• See page ??-?? for operation.
HF/6 m antenna
ACC cable supplied with the AT-180
IC-7100
To [ANT]
To [ACC]
To [ACC]*
*Either of the two
external connectors
Coaxial cable
To [TRANSCEIVER]
AT-180
Ground
To [ANT]
Coaxial cable supplied
with the AT-180
16-2
Ground
Previous view
16
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Connecting the antenna tuner (Continued)
D Connector information for the ACC(2) socket
PIN NO./
NAME
PIN LAYOUT
q8 V
w GND
e HSEND
r NC
t ALC
(Front panel view)
y NC
u 13.8 V
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Regulated 8 V output when the Band Voltage
modiﬁcation is performed. (p. ??-??)
Connects to ground.
Input/output pin.
Goes to ground when transmitting
When grounded, transmits.
No connection.
ALC output voltage
No connection.
13.8 V output when power is ON
Same as ACC pin q.
D Speciﬁcations for the AH-4
Frequency coverage
: 7–54 MHz (with an AH-2b)
3.5–54 MHz (with more than
7 meters long wire)
Input impedance
: 50 ȍ
Maximum input power
: 120 W
Minimum tuning power
: 10 W (5–15 W)
Tuning accuracy
: Less than SWR 2:1
Power supply requirements : 13.8 V DC/1 A (supplied from
the transceiver’s ACC socket)
Dimensions (mm/in)
: 172(W) u 69.5(H) u 230(D)
6.7 (W) u 2.7(H) u 9.0(D)
Weight (Approximately) : 1.2 kg; 2.6 lb
Supplied accessories
: See the AH-4 instruction
manual
D Speciﬁcations for the AT-180
Frequency coverage
Input impedance
Maximum input power
Minimum tuning power
Matching impedance range
: 1.8–54 MHz
: 50 ȍ
: 120 W
:8W
: 16.7–150 ȍ (HF band)
20–125 ȍ (50 MHz band)
Tuning accuracy
: Less than SWR 1.5:1
Insertion loss
: Less than 1.0 dB
(after tuning)
Power supply requirements : 13.8 V DC/1 A (supplied from
the transceiver’s ACC socket)
Dimensions (mm/in)
: 167(W) u 58.6(H) u 225(D)
6.6(W) u 2.3(H) u 8.9(D)
Weight (Approximately) : 2.3 kg; 5.1 lb
Supplied accessories
: ACC cable (DIN 13 pins)
Coaxial cable (1 m),
16-3
–
Same as ACC pin e.
–
Same as ACC pin y.
–
Same as ACC pin i.
Previous view
16
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Operating the AH-4
D Before operating
R DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE!
NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning or
transmitting.
Always place it in a secure place.
NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna connected. The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.
NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is ungrounded.
Transmitting before tuning may damage the transceiver.
Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a 1⁄2O long
wire or on a multiple of that frequency.
D Operating
Left
Tuning is required for each frequency. Be sure to retune
the antenna before transmitting when you change the
frequency—even slightly.
Display
Right
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
q Push TUNER/CALL (L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the remote control microphone to turn ON the AH-4.
The CW mode and 10 W output power are automatically selected, and the tuning starts.
Center
• The TX indicator lights red.
•“
” blinks while tuning.
• After changing the frequency, you should hold down
TUNER/CALL (L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the remote control
microphone for second to manually start tuning. In this
case, the CW mode and 10 W output power are automatically selected, and the TX indicator lights red.
NOTE: DO NOT change the frequency and oper” is blinking. It may takes
ating mode while “
approximately 2 to 3 seconds (maximum of 15
seconds) to complete tuning.
w“
” is still ON after the tuning is completed, and
the previously selected operating mode and the output power are automatically selected.
TUNER/CALL
[TUNER/CALL]
• When the connected wire cannot be tuned, “
” goes
out, the AH-4 is bypassed and the antenna wire is directly connected.
D PTT tune function
The AH-4 always tunes when [PTT] is pushed after the
frequency is changed on an HF band (more than 1%).
Turn ON this function in the Set mode.
(Function > Tuner > PTT Start)
16-4
Previous view
16
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Operating the AT-180
D Before operating
CAUTION:
• NEVER transmit with the tuner ON
connected. This will damage both
and antenna tuner.
• NEVER transmit with the tuner ON
connected. This will damage both
and antenna tuner.
if no antenna is
the transceiver
if no antenna is
the transceiver
NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna connected. The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.
NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is ungrounded.
Transmitting before tuning may damage the transceiver.
Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a 1⁄2O long
wire or on a multiple of that frequency.
16-5
Previous view
16
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Operating the AT-180 (Continued)
D Operating
Left
The AT-180 AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER automatically
matches to your antenna. Once the tuner matches the
antenna, the variable capacitor settings are memorized
as a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz
steps). Therefore, when you change the frequency
range, the variable capacitors are automatically preset
to the memorized point.
Display
Right
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
NOTE:
• The AT-180 can match both the HF and 50 MHz
bands. However, operation is different for the
bands.
• When connecting the AT-180, the transceiver’s output power should be more than 8 W. Otherwise, the
AT-180 may not tune correctly. The AT-180’s minimum operating input power is 8 W.
q Check the transceiver’s output power is set to 8 W/
w Push TUNER/CALL (L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the remote control microphone to turn ON the AT-180.
•“
” appears.
For the HF band:
The antenna is automatically tuned during transmit if
the antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.
TUNER/CALL
For the 50 MHz band:
” blinks if the antenna SWR is higher than
“
1.5:1, regardless of the internal switch position described on the page ??-??. In this case, do the step
e to manually tune the antenna.
[TUNER/CALL]
• If you continue to transmit without retuning, “
” goes
out after approximately 10 seconds, the AH-4 is bypassed
and the antenna wire is directly connected.
e Push TUNER/CALL (L) or [TUNER/CALL] on the remote control microphone for 1 second to start manual tuning.
• When the CW mode is selected, a side tone is emitted,
and “
” blinks.
NOTE: DO NOT change the frequency and operating mode while “
” is blinking.
r“
” is still ON after the tuning is completed, and
the previously selected operating mode is automatically selected.
• When the connected wire cannot be tuned, “
” goes
out, the AH-4 is bypassed and the antenna wire is directly connected.
Once the tuner matches the antenna, the variable
capacitors are automatically preset to the memorized point when you change the frequency range in
100 kHz steps.
• While presetting, “
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
” blinks.
16-6
Previous view
16
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Setting the AT-180 internal switches
The optional AT-180 has 3 operating conﬁgurations for
HF band operation. Select a suitable conﬁgurations for
your antenna system.
q Remove the top cover of the AT-180.
w Set the tuner switches to the desired positions according to the table below.
• AT-180 inside top cover
S2
S1
SW Position
Operation
The tuner operating mode is set by S2
(default) described below.
THROUGH INHIBIT
The tuner tunes the antenna even when
the antenna has poor SWR (up to VSWR
3:1 after tuning). In this case, manual tuning is necessary each time you change
the frequency although the tuner automatically starts tuning when the VSWR
is higher than 3:1. This setting is called
“through inhibit,” however, the tuner is set
to “through” if the VSWR is higher than
3:1 after tuning.
TUNER SENSITIVE SETTING
The tuner tunes each time you transmit
(except SSB mode). Therefore, the lowest SWR is obtained at any given time.
For SSB mode, the same SETTING as
the “D” position.
NORMAL
(default) The tuner tunes when the SWR is higher
than 1.5:1. Therefore, the tuner activates
only when tuning is necessary.
D Automatic tuner start (HF bands only)
If you want to turn OFF the tuner when the VSWR is
1.5:1 or less, use “automatic tuner on” and turn OFF
the tuner. See page 10-11 for automatic tuner function.
D PTT tune function
The AT-180 tunes when [PTT] is pushed after the
frequency is changed (more than 1%) if the AT-180
is turned ON. This function removes the “hold down
TUNER ” operation and activates with the ﬁrst transmission on the new frequency. (p. 10-11)
Turn this function ON in the Set mode.
16-7
S2
S1
D C
B A
Previous view
Section 17
SET MODE
Set mode description ............................................................17-2
D The Set mode settings ..........................................................17-2
Set mode items and Default settings...................................17-3
Voice Memo Set mode ...........................................................17-11
DV Set mode ..........................................................................17-13
SPEECH Set mode.................................................................17-15
QSO/RX Log Set mode ..........................................................17-16
Function Set mode ................................................................17-18
Tone Control Set mode .........................................................17-23
Connectors Set mode ...........................................................17-24
Display Set mode...................................................................17-27
Time Set Set mode ................................................................17-30
Others Set mode ....................................................................17-31
17-1
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode description
Left
The Set mode is used to program infrequently changed
values or function settings.
Display
Right
NOTE: The Set mode is constructed in a tree structure. You may go to the next tree level, or go back a
level, depending on the selected item.
The L, R, C or D in the
instructions indicate the
part of the controller.
L: Left side
R: Right side
C: Center bottom
D: Display (Touch panel)
Center
D The Set mode settings
q Push SET (C) to enter the Set mode.
w If the speciﬁed item is not displayed, touch [∫] or [√]
(D) one or more times to select the page.
• If [∫](D) or [√](D) is continuously held down, the pages
are quickly scrolled.
• Rotating the Dial also selects the pages.
e Touch the desired item to go to the next level.
r Repeat steps w and e to show the desired item’s
setting screen.
SET
• To go back the previous tree level, touch [](D), or
MENU (C).
t Touch a desired option shown on the display, or [+]/
[–](D) to adjust a level.
• When you touch an option, it is automatically saved and
the screen returns to the previous display.
• Rotating the Dial also adjusts the level.
• Push QUICK (C), and then touch “Default” to reset to the
default setting, if desired.
• To set other item, touch [](D), or MENU (C) to go back
a tree level.
y Push
SET (C)
to exit the Set mode.
17-2
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings
➥ Call sign (Section 9)
➥ RX Record (Section 9)
➥ MY Station (Section 7)
➥ SD Card (Section 13)
➥ GPS (Section 10)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Voice Memo
QSO Recorder
<>*
Play Files*
Recorder Set
REC Mode
RX REC Condition
In this item, set the TX/RX voice recording options.
Starts recording the received audio.
Selects to playback or delete the recorded audio.
TX&RX or RX Only
Always or Squelch Auto
File Split
OFF or ON
PTT Auto REC
OFF or ON
Player Set
Skip Time
Selects to record the TX audio or not.
Selects whether or not the squelch status affects
the RX voice audio recording.
Selects whether or not to automatically create
a new ﬁle after each transmission, reception, or
each time the squelch opens or closes.
Turns the PTT Automatic Recording function ON
or OFF.
3sec, 5sec, 10sec or 30sec
Sets the Skip time to rewind or forward the recorded audio when you push the fast-rewind or
fast-forward key during playback.
DV Auto Reply*
Records a voice audio to use for the Auto Reply
function in the DV mode.
* Be sure to insert the SD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
DV Set
In this item, set infrequently changed values or functions in the DV mode.
Standby Beep
OFF, ON or ON (to me: High Tone)
Selects whether or not to sound a beep after a
received signal disappears.
Auto Reply
OFF, ON or Voice
Selects whether or not to automatically reply to a
call addressed to your own call sign.
DV Data TX
PTT or Auto
Selects to manually or automatically transmit low
speed data.
Digital Monitor
Auto, Digital or Analog
Selects the DV mode RX monitoring when [XFC]
is held down.
Digital Repeater Set
OFF or ON
Turns the digital repeater setting function ON or
OFF. This function is usable in any DV mode except the DR mode.
RX Call Sign Write
OFF or Auto
Turns the RX call sign automatic write function
ON or OFF. This function is usable in any DV
mode except the DR mode.
RX Repeater Write
OFF or Auto
Turns the repeater call sign automatic write function ON or OFF. This function is usable in any DV
mode except the DR mode.
DV Auto Detect
OFF or ON
Turns the DV mode automatic detect function ON
or OFF.
RX Record (RPT)
ALL or Latest Only
Selects whether to record all calls or only the latest call, when the received signal includes a status message (“UR?” or “RPT?”) that is sent back
from the access repeater.
BK
OFF or ON
Turns the BK (Break-in) function ON or OFF.
The BK function allows you to break into a conversation between two stations with call sign
squelch enabled.
EMR
OFF or ON
Turns the EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request)
communication mode ON or OFF.
After turning OFF the transceiver, the EMR mode
will be cancelled.
EMR AF Level
0%~50%~100%
Sets the audio output level when an EMR mode
signal is received.
17-3
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
SPEECH
RX Call Sign SPEECH
In this item, set the Speech options.
OFF, ON (Kerchunk) or ON (All)
RX>CS SPEECH
S-Level SPEECH
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
MODE SPEECH
OFF or ON
SPEECH Language
English or Japanese
Alphabet
Normal or Phonetic Code
SPEECH Speed
SPEECH Level
Slow or Fast
0%~50%~100%
QSO/RX Log
QSO Log*1
RX History Log*1
Selects the RX call sign speech function option
while ON, or turn it OFF.
Turns the RX>CS Speech function ON or OFF.
Turns the Signal Strength Level Speech function
ON or OFF.
Turns the Operating Mode Speech function ON
or OFF.
Selects either English or Japanese as the desired speech language.
Selects the alphabet character announcement
type.
Selects Slow or Fast speech speed.
Sets the volume level for the voice synthesizer.
In this item, set the QSO/RX History Log options.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to make a communication
log on the SD card.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to make a DV mode’s receive history log on the SD card.
CSV Format
Separator/Decimal
Sep [,] Dec [.]*2, Sep [;] Dec [.] or Sep Selects the separator and the decimal character
[;] Dec [,]
for the CSV format.
Date
yyyy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yyyy*2 or dd/mm/ Selects the date format.
yyyy
*1 Be sure to insert the SD card into the transceiver before selecting these items.
*2 The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.
17-4
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Function
Monitor
In this item, set the function options.
OFF or ON
Monitor Level
Beep Level
0%~50%~100%
0%~50%~100%
Beep Level Limit
OFF or ON
Beep (Conﬁrmation)
Band Edge Beep
User Band Edge
RF/SQL Control
TX Delay
HF
50M
144M
430M
Time-Out Timer
PTT Lock
SPLIT/DUP
Quick SPLIT
SPLIT Offset
SPLIT LOCK
DUP Offset
Selects whether or not to monitor your transmit
signal in any mode other than CW.
Sets the monitor level.
Sets the beep output level.
Selects whether or not to limit the volume to the
speciﬁed level, and further rotation of the [AF]
control will not increase the level.
OFF or ON
Turns the conﬁrmation beep tones ON or OFF.
OFF, ON (Default), ON (User) or ON Selects whether or not to sound a beep when you
(User) & TX Limit
tune outside of, or back into the amateur band's
frequency range.
1: 1.800.000–1.999.999
Selects the user band frequency range to sound
2: 3.500.000–3.999.999
a beep when the Band Edge Beep function is
3: 7.000.000–7.300.000
set to “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit,” and
4: 10.100.000–10.150.000
you tune outside of, or back into a programmed
5: 14.000.000–14.350.000
range.
6: 18.068.000–18.168.000
7: 21.000.000–21.450.000
8: 24.890.000–24.990.000
9: 28.000.000–29.700.000
10: 50.000.000–54.000.000
11: 144.000.000–146.000.000
12: 430.000.000–440.000.000
13~30: (blank)
Auto, SQL or RF+SQL
Select the function of the [RF/SQL] control.
OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to
30ms
prevent any external equipment that is connected
from damage by the reﬂected wave.
OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to
30ms
prevent any external equipment that is connected
from damage by the reﬂected wave.
OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to
30ms
prevent any external equipment that is connected
from damage by the reﬂected wave.
OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms or Sets the transmission’s timing of the IC-7100 to
30ms
prevent any external equipment that is connected
from damage by the reﬂected wave.
OFF, 3min, 5min, 10min, 20min or Selects the Time-Out Timer time options to pre30min
vent an accidental prolonged transmission.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to inhibit transmission.
One Touch Repeater
OFF or ON
–9.999 MHz~0.000 MHz~+9.999 MHz
OFF or ON
0.0000 MHz~9.9999 MHz
(The default value may differ, depending on the frequency band and the
transceiver version.)
DUP– or DUP+
Auto Repeater
OFF, ON (DUP) or ON (DUP,TONE)
17-5
Turns the Quick SPLIT function ON or OFF.
Sets the frequency offset for the Split function.
Turns the SPLIT LOCK function ON or OFF.
Sets the frequency offset for repeater operation.
Selects the duplex direction for the One Touch
Repeater function.
Turns the Auto Repeater function ON or OFF.
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Tuner
Auto Start
PTT Start
[TUNER] Switch
OFF or ON
Turns the automatic antenna tuner function ON
or OFF.
Turns the PTT Tuner Start function ON or OFF.
Selects whether or not to store the AT-180’s status by each band.
OFF or ON
Manual or Auto
[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch
SPEECH/LOCK, LOCK/SPEECH
Lock Function
MAIN DIAL or PANEL
Memopad Numbers
MAIN DIAL Auto TS
5 or 10
OFF, LOW or HIGH
MIC Up/Down Speed
Slow or Fast
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB)
Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual
[NOTCH] Switch (AM)
SSB/CW Sync Tuning
Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual
OFF or ON
CW Normal Side
LSB or USB
VOICE 1st Menu
VOICE-Root or VOICE-TX
KEYER 1st Menu
KEYER-Root or KEYER-SEND
Speaker Out
MIC AF Out
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
RC MIC
[F-1]
Power OFF (With No Controller)
---, P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,
RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD,
M-CLR, BANK, SPLIT, A/B, DUP,
TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,
DR, FROM/TO(DR), SCAN, Voice TX
(T1)
---, P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,
RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD,
M-CLR, BANK, SPLIT, A/B, DUP,
TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,
DR, FROM/TO(DR), SCAN, Voice TX
(T1)
 SSB,  CW,  RTTY,  AM,  FM,
 WFM,  DV
(All boxes are checked.)
OFF or ON
REF Adjust
0 %~100 %
[F-2]
Mode Select
17-6
Selects the function for SPEECH
when pushed
or held down.
Selects the dial lock function to prevent frequency changes by accidental movement of the tuning dial.
Sets the number of usable memopad channels.
Selects an option for the automatic tuning step
function. When rapidly rotating the main dial, the
tuning step automatically changes according to
the setting.
Selects the steps per second when changing an
operating frequency by holding down the microphone’s [∫]/[√] key.
Selects the notch function for the SSB mode.
Selects the notch function for the AM mode.
Turns the Synchronous Tuning function ON or
OFF to shift the operating frequency by the offset
amount to keep receiving a signal when the operating mode is changed between SSB and CW.
Sets the carrier point for CW normal mode operation to the LSB side or the USB side.
Select whether or not to directly select the voice
send menu, skipping the voice menu.
Select whether or not to directly select the keyer
send menu, skipping the memory keyer menu.
Selects to mute the speaker output.
Selects to output the received audio from the
[MIC] connector.
The functions listed to the left can be set to [F-1]
of the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.
The functions listed to the left can be set to [F-2]
of the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.
Disables the mode selection of the optional HM151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC, to simplify operation.
Selects whether or not to automatically turn OFF
the transceiver when the controller is disconnected from the transceiver.
Sets a number to adjust for a zero beat with a
standard signal such as WWV or WWVH, for frequency calibration.
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Tone Control
RX
SSB
RX HPF/LPF
In this item, set the RX/TX tone control options.
---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400
Sets the high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter of the
receive audio.
Sets the bass level of the receive audio.
Sets the treble level of the receive audio.
RX Bass
RX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
RX HPF/LPF
---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400
RX Bass
RX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
RX HPF/LPF
---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400
RX Bass
RX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
RX HPF/LPF
---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400
RX Bass
RX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
Sets the high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter of the
receive audio.
Sets the bass level of the receive audio.
Sets the treble level of the receive audio.
RX Bass
RX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
Sets the bass level of the receive audio.
Sets the treble level of the receive audio.
RX HPF/LPF
---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400
Sets the high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter of the
receive audio.
RX HPF/LPF
---- – ----, 100~2000 – 500~2400
Sets the high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter of the
receive audio.
TX Bass
TX Treble
TBW (WIDE)
–5~0~+5
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.
–5~0~+5
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.
100, 200, 300, 500 – 2500, 2700, Sets the lower and higher cut-off frequencies to
2800, 2900
change the transmission passband width for the
wide setting.
100, 200, 300, 500 – 2500, 2700, Sets the lower and higher cut-off frequencies to
2800, 2900
change the transmission passband width for the
mid setting.
100, 200, 300, 500 – 2500, 2700, Sets the lower and higher cut-off frequencies to
2800, 2900
change the transmission passband width for the
narrow setting.
AM
Sets the high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter of the
receive audio.
Sets the bass level of the receive audio.
Sets the treble level of the receive audio.
FM
Sets the high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter of the
receive audio.
Sets the bass level of the receive audio.
Sets the treble level of the receive audio.
DV
WFM
CW
RTTY
TX
SSB
TBW (MID)
TBW (NAR)
AM
TX Bass
TX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.
TX Bass
TX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.
TX Bass
TX Treble
–5~0~+5
–5~0~+5
Sets the bass level of the transmit audio.
Sets the treble level of the transmit audio.
FM
DV
17-7
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Connectors
USB Audio SQL
ACC/USB Output Select
ACC/USB AF Level
ACC/USB IF Level
ACC MOD Level
DATA MOD Level
USB MOD Level
DATA OFF MOD
DATA MOD
External Keypad
VOICE
In this item, set the external connector’s options.
OFF (OPEN) or ON
Selects whether or not to output the audio from
the [USB] connector, according to the squelch
state (open or closed).
AF or IF
Sets the [USB] connector and the [ACC] socket
usage to received audio output or the IF output
for DRM (Digital Radio Mondiale).
0 %~50 %~100 %
Sets the audio output level at the [ACC] socket
and the [USB] connector.
0 %~50 %~100 %
Sets the IF output level at the [ACC] socket and
the [USB] connector.
0 %~50 %~100 %
Sets the input modulation level at the [ACC]
socket.
0 %~50 %~100 %
Sets the input modulation level at the [DATA]
jack.
0 %~50 %~100 %
Sets the input modulation level at the [USB] connector.
MIC, ACC, MIC,ACC or USB
Selects the connector(s) for the desired modulation to input when the data mode is not used.
MIC, ACC, MIC,ACC or USB
Selects the connector(s) for the desired modulation to input when the data mode is used.
OFF or ON
KEYER
OFF or ON
RTTY
OFF or ON
CI-V
CI-V Baud Rate
CI-V Address
CI-V Transceive
USB2/DATA1 Function
USB2 Function
DATA1 Function
GPS Out
Selects whether or not to transmit voice memory
contents using the external keypad.
Selects whether or not to transmit keyer memory
contents using the external keypad.
Selects whether or not to transmit RTTY memory
contents using the external keypad.
300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 or Auto Sets the CI-V code transfer speed.
01h~88h~DFh
Sets the transceiver's unique CI-V hexadecimal
address code.
OFF or ON
Turns the CI-V Transceive function ON or OFF.
OFF, RTTY Decode or DV Data
OFF, RTTY Decode, DV Data or GPS
OFF or DATA1  USB2
DV Data/GPS Out Baud
RTTY Decode Baud
VSEND Select
4800 or 9600
300, 1200, 4800, 9600 or 19200
OFF, UHF or VHF/UHF
9600bps Mode
OFF or ON
17-8
Selects the use of the COM port (USB2).
Select the use of the [DATA1] jack.
Selects whether or not to output the data to the
COM port (USB2) when data is input from a GPS
receiver through the [DATA1] jack.
Sets the DV or GPS data transfer speed
Sets the RTTY decode monitor speed.
Selects the band to use for the [ACC] socket’s pin
7 (VSEND usage).
Selects whether or not to allow data transmission
at 9600 bps.
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Display
LCD Contrast
LCD Backlight
Key Backlight
Meter Peak Hold
BW Popup (PBT)
BW Popup (FIL)
RX Call Sign Display
RX Message Display
Reply Position Display
TX Call Sign Display
Scroll Speed
VOICE TX Name Display
KEYER Memory Display
Opening Message
Power ON Check
Display Language
System Language
Time Set
Date/Time
DATE
TIME
GPS Time Correct
In this item, set the transceiver’s display options.
0%~25%~100%
Sets the contrast level of the LCD.
0%~50%~100%
Sets the backlight level of the LCD.
0%~50%~100%
Sets the backlight level of the key.
OFF or ON
Turns the Meter Peak Hold function ON or OFF.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to display the PBT shifting
value while rotating the TWIN-PBT control.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to display the IF ﬁlter width
and shifting value when the IF ﬁlter is switched.
OFF, Auto or Auto (RX Hold)
Selects whether or not to display the call sign of
the caller station when a call is received.
OFF or Auto
Selects whether or not to display and scroll a received message.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to display the caller’s position data when the data is included in the Auto
Replay signal.
OFF, Your Call Sign or My Call Sign
Selects whether or not to display My or Your call
sign while transmitting.
Slow or Fast
Sets the scrolling speed of the message, call
sign, or other text, that are displayed on the
transceiver’s LCD.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to display the voice TX
memory name on the voice TX memory selection display.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to display the keyer memory contents on the keyer send selection display.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to display the opening
message at power ON.
OFF or ON
Selects whether or not to display the RF Power,
RIT, Auto Power OFF condition at power ON.
English or Japanese
Sets the screen display language type in the DR
mode or Menu mode.
When the System Language is “English,” this
item disappears.
English or Japanese
Sets the system language of the transceiver.
In this item, set the time options.
2000/01/01~2099/12/31
0:00~23:59
OFF or Auto
UTC Offset
–14:00~+9:00~+14:00
Clock Display
Auto Power OFF
Local or UTC
OFF, 30min, 60min, 90min or 120min
17-9
Sets the date.
Sets the time.
Selects whether or not to automatically correct
the time data by a received GPS sentence.
Sets the time difference between UTC (Universal
Time Coordinated) and the local time.
Sets the clock display mode.
Sets to automatically turn OFF the transceiver
power after no operation is made during this set
period.
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Set mode items and Default settings (Continued)
NOTE: The default settings shown below in bold are for the USA version.
The default settings may differ, depending on your transceiver version.
Others
Information
Version
In this item, set other options.
Shows the transceiver’s ﬁrmware version number.
Clone
Clone Mode
Reads or writes the CS-7100 data to or from the
PC, and/or receives data from a Master transceiver.
Writes your IC-7100 (Master) data to another IC7100 (Sub).
Adjusts the touch screen.
Clone Master Mode
Touch Screen Calibration
Reset
Partial Reset
Returns all settings to their default values, without clearing the memory contents, call sign
memories or repeater lists.
Clears all programming and memories, and return all settings to their default values.
All Reset
17-10
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Voice Memo Set mode
<>
NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created, as shown
in the example below:
(Example) Recording date: 2013/3/1
Folder name: 20130301
• The ﬁle name is automatically created, as shown in
the example below:
(Example) Recording date: 2013/3/1 15:30:00
File name: 20130301_153000
• The voice audio is recorded onto an SD card, and
saved in the “wav” format.
The recorded voice audio can also be played back
on a PC.
The extension, “wav,” is not displayed on the transceiver’s screen.
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > <>
Insert an SD card into the transceiver before selecting this item.
Touch [<>] to start voice recording.
• “Recording started.” appears.
• [<>] is displayed while recording.
REC Mode
Once recording has started, the recording will continue, even the transceiver is rebooted.
To stop the recording, touch [<>].
(Default: TX&RX)
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > REC
Mode (REC Mode)
Records both the transmitted and received audio as the
default setting.
• TX&RX: Records both the transmitted and received
audio.
• RX Only: Records only the received audio.
Play Files
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Play Files (PLAY FILES)
Insert an SD card into the transceiver before selecting this item.
When transmitting while recording
When “OFF” is selected in File Split, the recording is
paused. After you stop transmitting, the recording resumes.
When “ON” is selected in File Split, a new ﬁle is automatically created, and the transmitted audio is recorded
into the new one.
Do the following steps to play back the recorded audio
on the SD card.
Touch [Play Files], and folders on the SD card are displayed.
• These folders contain the stored ﬁles.
Playing back
q Touch [∫] or [√], or rotate [DIAL] to select the folder
that includes the desired ﬁle to play back, and then
touch the folder.
w Touch [∫] or [√], or rotate [DIAL] to select the ﬁle to
play back, and then touch the ﬁle.
RX REC Condition
(Default: Squelch Auto)
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > RX
REC Condition (RX REC Condition)
Select whether or not the squelch status affects the RX
voice audio recording.
• Always:
The transceiver always records the RX
audio regardless of the squelch status.
• Squelch Auto: The transceiver records the RX audio
only when a signal is received (the
squelch is opened).
When the squelch closes while recording, the recording will continue for 2
seconds, and then pause.
• The VOICE PLAYER screen is displayed and the selected ﬁle is played back.
• See “Operation while playing back” for forwording or rewinding. (p. ??-??)
e Push MENU or touch [] on the display to stop the
playback.
• Returns to the ﬁle list screen.
When “ON” is selected in File Split, and if the squelch
either opens or closes while recording, a new ﬁle is
automatically created.
17-11
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Voice Memo Set mode (Continued)
File Split
Skip Time
(Default: ON)
(Default: 10sec)
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > File
Split (File Split)
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Player Set > Skip Time
(Skip Time)
Turn the File Split function ON or OFF.
• OFF: When the recording starts, a new ﬁle is automatically created in the folder of the SD card.
The audio is continuously recorded into the
ﬁle, even if transmission and reception, or the
squelch status (open and close) is switched.
If the ﬁle size exceeds 2 GB, a new ﬁle is automatically created in the same folder, and the
audio is recorded there.
• ON: When the recording starts, a new ﬁle is automatically created in the folder of the SD card.
During recording, and if transmission and reception, or squelch status (open and close) is
switched, a new ﬁle is automatically created in
the same folder, and the audio is saved into the
new one.
Set the SkipTimer to 3, 5, 10 or 30 seconds to rewind
or skip forward for this set period when you push the
fast-rewind or fast-forward key.
PTT Auto REC
• See “Operation while playing back” for forwording or rewinding operation. (p. ??-??)
DV Auto Reply
Voice Memo > DV Auto Reply (DV AUTO REPLY)
Up to 10 seconds of audio can be recorded for the automatic reply function.
See page ??-?? for details of recording audio.
Be sure to insert an SD card into the transceiver before selecting this item.
(Default: OFF)
Voice Memo > QSO Recorder > Recorder Set > PTT
Auto REC (PTT Auto REC)
Turn the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or
OFF.
Recording starts when a signal is transmitted from an
external speaker microphone, the VOX functions or a
CI-V command is sent.
• OFF: The recording does not start even if a signal is
transmitted.
• ON: The recording automatically starts when a signal is transmitted.
The recording will stop when:
• No signal is transmitted for 10 seconds after the last
transmission.
• No signal is received for 10 seconds after the last
transmission.
- 10 minutes after the last transmission while the
squelch is open (SSB/CW/RTTY/AM modes.)
- A signal is received within 10 seconds after the last
transmission, the received signal is also recorded.
A signal is received within 10 seconds after the last
reception, the received signal is also recorded.
• The frequency or operating mode is changed while
transmitting.
• The operating method (V/M, CALL, DR, M-CH, Band
Stacking Register, and so on) has been changed.
17-12
Previous view
17
SET MODE
DV Set mode
Standby Beep
Digital Monitor
(Default: ON)
(Default: Auto)
DV Set > Standby Beep (Standby Beep)
DV Set > Digital Monitor (Digital Monitor)
Turn the standby beep function ON or OFF.
This function sounds a beep after a received signal disappears.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON to sound a beep.
• ON (to me: High Tone):
Turns the function ON to sound a beep. If the
signal is addressed to your call sign, a high
pitch beep sounds.
Select the receive mode when [XFC] is held down in the
DV mode.
• Auto: Receives in the DV mode or the FM mode,
depending on the received signal.
• Digital: Monitors in the DV mode.
• Analog: Monitors in the FM mode.
Digital Repeater Set
DV Set > Digital Repeater Set (Digital Repeater Set)
NOTE:
• Even if “Beep (Confirmation)” of the Function screen
is OFF, the standby beep sounds.
• The standby beep output level can be set in “Beep
Level” of the Function screen.
Auto Reply
Turn the digital repeater setting function ON or OFF.
In any DV mode except for the DR mode, and when accessing a repeater that has a call sign that is different
than the transceiver’s setting, this function reads the
repeater’s transmit signal and automatically sets the
repeater call sign.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Automatically sets the repeater call sign.
(Default: OFF)
DV Set > Auto Reply (Auto Reply)
Set the automatic reply function to ON, OFF or Voice.
This function automatically replies to a call addressed
to your own call sign, even if you are away from the
transceiver.
When “ON” or “Voice” is selected, the automatic reply
function is automatically turned OFF when you push
[PTT].
• OFF: The automatic reply function is OFF.
• ON: Replies with your own call sign. (No audio reply
is sent)
• Voice: Replies with your call sign and any Auto Reply
message recorded on the microSD (up to 10
seconds).
If no SD card is inserted or no message is recorded, only your call sign is transmitted. The
transmitted audio will be heard from the speaker.
DV Data TX
(Default: ON)
RX Call Sign Write
(Default: OFF)
DV Set > RX Call Sign Write (RX Call Sign Write)
Set the RX call sign automatic write function to Auto
or OFF.
When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign
in any DV mode except for the DR mode, this function
automatically sets the caller station call sign into “UR.”
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• Auto: Automatically sets the call sign of the caller station into “UR.”
RX Repeater Write
(Default: OFF)
DV Set > RX Repeater Write (RX Repeater Write)
Set the repeater call sign automatic write function to
Auto or OFF.
When receiving a call addressed to your own call sign
through a repeater in any DV mode except for the DR
mode, this function automatically sets the call sign of
the repeater into “R1” or “R2.”
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• Auto: Automatically sets the call sign of the repeater
into “R1” and/or “R2.”
(Default: Auto)
DV Set > DV Data TX (DV Data TX)
Select whether to manually or automatically transmit
slow-speed data.
• PTT: Push [PTT] to manually transmit the input data.
• Auto: When data is input from a PC through either the
[USB2] port or [DATA1] jack*, the transceiver
automatically transmits it.
*“USB2 Function” or “USB2 Function” item must
be set to “DV Data.” (p. ??)
17-13
Previous view
17
SET MODE
DV Set mode (Continued)
DV Auto Detect
EMR
(Default: OFF)
(Default: OFF)
DV Set > DV Auto Detect (DV Auto Detect)
DV Set > EMR (EMR)
Turn the DV mode automatic detect function ON or
OFF.
If you receive a non-digital signal during DV mode operation, this function automatically switches to the FM
mode.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF. The operating mode is
ﬁxed to the DV mode.
• ON: Automatically selects the FM mode for temporary operation.
The EMR (Enhanced Monitor Request) communication mode can be used in the digital mode. In the EMR
mode, no call sign setting is necessary.
When an EMR mode signal is received, the audio
(voice) will be heard at the speciﬁed level even if the
volume setting level is set to minimum level, or digital
call sign/digital code squelch is in use.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON.
“EMR” appears on the display.
RX Record (RPT)
NOTE: The EMR function is automatically turned
OFF when transceiver is turned OFF.
(Default: ALL)
DV Set > RX Record (RPT) (RX Record (RPT))
The transceiver can record the data of up to 50 individual calls.
When the received signal includes a status message
(“UR?” or “RPT?”) that is sent back from the access
repeater, you can record up to 50 messages or only the
latest one, in the Received Call Record.
• ALL:
Records up to 50 calls.
• Latest Only: Records only the latest call.
BK
EMR AF Level
(Default: 50%)
DV Set > EMR AF Level (EMR AF Level)
Set the audio output level to between 0% (no audio),
1% (minimum) and 100% (maximum) for when an EMR
communication mode signal is received.
When an EMR signal is received, the audio will be
heard at the set level, or the [AF] control level, whichever is higher.
To disable the setting, set it to “0%.”
(Default: OFF)
DV Set > BK (BK)
NOTE: After an EMR signal disappears, the audio
level will remain at the EMR level. In this case, rotate
[AF] to adjust the audio level.
The BK (Break-in) function allows you to break into a
conversation, where the two other stations are communicating with call sign squelch enabled.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns the function ON.
“BK” appears on the display.
NOTE: The BK function is automatically turned OFF
when transceiver is turned OFF.
17-14
Previous view
17
SET MODE
SPEECH Set mode
RX Call Sign SPEECH (Default: ON (Kerchunk))
MODE SPEECH
SPEECH > RX Call Sign SPEECH (RX Call Sign
SPEECH)
SPEECH > MODE SPEECH (MODE SPEECH)
Turn the Operating Mode Speech function ON or OFF.
When this function is ON, the selected operating mode
is announced when the mode switch is pushed.
• OFF: The selected operating mode is not announced.
• ON: The selected operating mode is announced.
Turn the RX call sign speech function ON or OFF for
calls received in the DV mode.
• OFF:
No announcement is made even
when a call is received.
• ON (Kerchunk): The caller station’s call sign is announced only when it makes a short
transmission.
• ON (All):
The caller station’s call sign is always
announced.
SPEECH Language
(Default: English)
SPEECH > SPEECH Language (SPEECH Language)
Set the desired announcement language to English or
Japanese.
NOTE:
• When the digital squelch function is used, the calling station’s call sign is not announced if the received signal is not addressed to your call sign, or
does not include an unmatched digital code.
• When the repeater returns “UR?” or “RPT?,” the
calling station’s call sign is not announced.
• When a call is received during scanning, the scan
resumes even while the transceiver announcing.
• A “/” or a note after a call sign are not announced.
• When a call is received during an announcement,
the received audio is heard after cancelling the announcement.
RX>CS SPEECH
(Default: OFF)
Alphabet
(Default: Normal)
SPEECH > Alphabet (Alphabet)
Select either “Normal” or “Phonetic Code” to announce
the alphabet character.
• Normal:
Normal code is used. (for example: A
as eh, B as bee)
• Phonetic Code: Phonetic code is used. (for example:
A as Alfa, B as Bravo)
SPEECH Speed
(Default: ON)
(Default: Fast)
SPEECH > RX>CS SPEECH (RX>CS SPEECH)
SPEECH > SPEECH Speed (SPEECH Speed)
Turn the RX>CS Speech function ON or OFF.
The RX>CS Speech function announces the station
call sign that is selected from a Received Call Record
by holding down AUTO TUNE RXCS . (p. ??-??)
• OFF: The station call sign is not announced.
• ON: The station call sign is announced.
Set the speech speed to Low (slow) or High (fast).
S-Level SPEECH
SPEECH Level
(Default: 50%)
SPEECH > SPEECH Level (SPEECH Level)
Enter a volume level number between 0% (no voice),
1% (minimum) and 100% (maximum) for the voice synthesizer.
The voice synthesizer audio output level from the
speaker is linked with [AF] setting from the minimum
audio volume up to the set level.
(Default: ON)
SPEECH > MODE SPEECH (MODE SPEECH)
Turn the Signal strength level Speech function ON or
OFF.
• OFF: Only the operating frequency is announced.
• ON: The operating frequency and the signal strength
level are announced.
17-15
Previous view
17
SET MODE
QSO/RX Log Set mode
QSO Log
RX History Log
(Default: OFF)
(Default: OFF)
QSO/RX Log > QSO Log (QSO Log)
QSO/RX Log > RX History Log (RX History Log)
Select whether or not to make a communication log on
the SD card.
The communication log is saved in the “csv” format.
Be sure to insert the SD card into the transceiver before making a communication log.
• OFF: The QSO Log function is OFF.
• ON: The QSO Log is made on the SD card.
The transceiver starts making a log with your
send contents.
Select whether or not to make a DV mode’s receive history log on the SD card.
The receive history log can be made on the card, and
saved in the “csv” format. Be sure to insert the card into
the transceiver before making a communication log.
• OFF: The RX History Log function is OFF.
• ON : The transceiver makes a DV mode’s receive history log on the SD card.
The transceiver starts making a receive history
log when you ﬁnish to talk.
NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created as [IC7100\QsoLog].
• The ﬁle name is automatically created, as shown in
the example below:
Log start date and time: 2013/3/1 15:30:00
File name: 20130301_153000.csv
• The log contents cannot be displayed on the transceiver.
• You can see the log contents on an SD card in a
PC. (p. ??-??)
NOTE:
• The folder name is automatically created as [IC7100\RxLog].
• The ﬁle name is automatically created, as shown in
the example below:
Log start date and time: 2013/3/1 15:30:00
File name: 20130301_153000.csv
• The log contents cannot be displayed on the transceiver.
• You can see the log contents on an SD card in a
PC. (p. ??-??)
Separator/Decimal
(Default: Sep [,] Dec [.]*)
QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Separator/Decimal
(Separator/Decimal)
Select the separator and the decimal character for the
CSV format.
• Sep [,] Dec [.]: Separator is “,” and Decimal is “.” for the
CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [.]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “.” for
the CSV format.
• Sep [;] Dec [;]: Separator is “;” and Decimal is “;” for
the CSV format.
*The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.
Date
(Default: mm/dd/yyyy*)
QSO/RX Log > CSV Format > Date (Date)
Select the date format between “yyyy/mm/dd,” “mm/dd/
yyyy” and “dd/mm/yyyy.” (y: year, m: month, d: day)
*The default value may differ, depending on the transceiver version.
17-16
Previous view
17
SET MODE
QSO/RX Log Set mode (Continued)
The QSO log contents are shown below:
Content
TX/RX
Date
Example
Description
TX
RX
Transmission and reception
12/23/2012 12/23/2012 Date and time the call was started.
13:51:48
13:51:48
Frequency
438.010000 438.010000 Operating frequencies
(When Duplex is set, the frequencies of the called are displayed.)
Mode
DV
DV
Operating mode (All mode)
My Latitude
34.764667 34.764667 Your latitude (unit: degree) +: North latitude, –: South latitude
My Longitude 135.375333 135.375333 Your longitude (unit: degree) +: East longitude, –: West longitude
My Altitude
50.5
50.5
Your altitude (unit: ft) Records to one decimal place.
RF Power
100%
(Blank)
TX output power level
The relative signal strength of the receive signal (in sixteen levels)
S Meter
(Blank)
S0
RPT Call Sign JP3YHJ A JP3YHJ A Repeater call sign (DV mode only)
TX Call sign (DV mode only)
TX Call Sign
CQCQCQ (Blank)
RX Call Sign
(Blank)
JA3YUA A RX Call sign (DV mode only)
RX Latitude
(Blank)
34.764667 Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: North latitude, –: South latitude
Records only when you receive in the DV mode.
RX Longitude (Blank)
135.375333 Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: East longitude, –: West longitude
Records only when you receive in the DV mode.
RX Altitude
(Blank)
30.5
Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)
Records only when you receive in the DV mode.
The RX History log contents are shown below:
Content
Frequency
Mode
Caller
Called
Rx RPT1
Rx RPT2
Message
Status
Received date
BK
EMR
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
SSID
GPS-A Symbol
Course
GPS Time Stamp
GPS Message
Example
438.010000
DV
JA3YUA A
7100
CQCQCQ
JP3YHH G
Description
RX Frequency
Operating mode (DV is ﬁxed)
Call sign of the caller station
Note after the call sign
Call sign of the called station
Access repeater call sign of the caller station or the gateway repeater call sign
of your local area repeater.
JP3YHJ A
Access repeater call sign of the called station
Hello CQ D-STAR! Message included in the received call (up to 20 characters)
Normal: blank, Uplink: UPLINK,
(Blank)
Access repeater reply: “UR?” or “RPT?”
12/23/2012
Date and time the call was received
13:51:48
Depending on the setting, the format may differ.
BK call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
EMR call: “*”, Normal call: Blank
34.764667
Caller’s latitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: North latitude, –: South latitude
135.375333
Caller’s longitude, if sent. (unit: degree) +: East longitude, –: West longitude
30.5
Caller’s altitude, if sent. (unit: ft)
-A
Records one of 0, -1 to -15 and -A to -Z.
Car
Icon: Converts to text
None: Code
123
Caller’s course (unit: degree)
12:00:00
Time data that the caller station acquires the position data
Osaka City/IC-7100 Caller is “DV-G”: Records the GPS message
Caller is “DV-A: Records the GPS-A comment
17-17
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Function Set mode
Monitor
Band Edge Beep
(Default: OFF)
(Default: ON (Default))
Function > Monitor (Monitor)
Function > Band Edge Beep (Band Edge Beep)
Turn the monitor function ON or OFF.
This function allows you to monitor your transmit signal
in any mode other than CW.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Monitors your transmit signal.
When you tune into or out of an amateur band’s frequency range, you can hear a beep tone.
If you select “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit,” you
can program a total of 30 band edge frequencies in the
“User band Edge” item.
You can set the beep output level in the “Beep Level”
item as described to the left.
• OFF:
Band edge beep is OFF
• ON (Default): When you tune into or out of the default amateur band’s frequency range,
a beep sounds.
• ON (User): When you tune into or out of a user programmed amateur band’s frequency
range, a beep sounds.
• ON (User) & TX Limit:
When you tune into or out of a user programmed amateur band’s frequency
range, a beep sounds.
In addition, transmission is inhibited
outside the programmed range.
Monitor Level
(Default: 50%)
Function > Monitor Level (Monitor Level)
Adjust a transmit signal monitor level number between
0% (no audio), 1% (minimum) and 100% (maximum)
for the voice synthesizer.
Beep Level
(Default: 50%)
Function > Beep Level (Beep Level)
Adjust the conﬁrmation and band edge beep tones output level to between 0% (no beep), 1% (minimum) and
100% (maximum).
Beep Level Limit
User Band Edge
(Default: ON)
(Default: ??)
Function > User Band Edge (User Band Edge)
Function > Beep Level Limit (Beep Level Limit)
This “User Band Edge” item appears only when “ON
(User)” or “User (ON) & TX Limit” is selected in the
“Band Edge Beep” item.
When you select “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit”
in the “Band Edge Beep” item, you can program a total
of 30 band edge frequencies in this item.
See page ??-?? for programming details.
Turn the conﬁrmation and band edge beep tones output level limiting ON or OFF.
When you set this item to ON, the beep tones are
adjusted by the [AF] control until rotating the control
reaches to the speciﬁed level. Further rotation will not
increase the volume of the beep tones.
• OFF: Beep level adjustment is not limited.
• ON: Beep level adjustment is limited with the [AF]
control.
RF/SQL Control
(Default: RF+SQL)
Function > RF/SQL Control (RF/SQL Control)
Beep (Conﬁrmation)
(Default: ON)
Set the [RF/SQL] control operation.
• AUTO:
[RF/SQL] functions as only an RF gain control in SSB, CW and RTTY; a squelch control in AM, FM, WFM and DV.
• SQL:
[RF/SQL] functions as a squelch control.
• RF+SQL: [RF/SQL] functions not only as an RF gain
control, but also as a squelch control in all
modes.
Function > Beep (Conﬁrmation) (Beep (Conﬁrmation))
Turn the conﬁrmation beep ON or OFF.
Set the beep output level in the “Beep Level” item as
described above.
• OFF: The conﬁrmation beep is OFF. (Silent operation)
• ON: The conﬁrmation beep sounds each time a
switch is pushed.
17-18
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Function Set mode (Continued)
TX Delay
SPLIT Offset
(Default: All bands; OFF)
Function > TX Delay (TX Delay)
Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT Offset (SPLIT Offset)
Sets the transmission’s timing for each operating
band.
If the external equipment initiates its transmission later
than the transceiver, reﬂected wave may occur. This
may damage the external equipment.
Delaying the timing prevents the reﬂected waving.
• OFF:
The transmission timing is normal.
• 10 to 30ms: The transmission delays within the set
period of time (10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 milliseconds).
Time-Out Timer
Set the offset* for the quick split function.
*The difference between transmit and receive frequencies.
The frequency offset can be set to between –9.999
MHz and +9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.
SPLIT LOCK
Turn the Split Lock function ON or OFF.
When this item is set to ON, you can use [MAIN DIAL]
to adjust the transmit frequency while holding down
[XFC], even while the Dial Lock function is enabled.
To prevent accidentally changing the receive frequency
by rotating the main dial, use both the SPLIT LOCK
and Dial Lock functions.
See pages ??-?? and ??-?? for split frequency operation details.
(Default: OFF)
To prevent accidental prolonged transmission, the
transceiver has a time-out timer.
The function inhibits continuous transmissions longer
than the set time period.
• OFF:
Turns the function OFF.
• 3 to 30 min: The transmission is cut OFF after the set
time period ends (3, 5, 10, 20 or 30 minutes).
DUP Offset
(Default: 0.1000 MHz)
Function > SPLIT/DUP > DUP Offset (DUP Offset)
Set the offset* for duplex operation. You can set the repeater offset for each band.
*The difference between transmit and receive frequencies.
(Default: OFF)
Function > PTT Lock (PTT Lock)
➥ Before selecting this item, select the desired frequency band. Then, set the offset.
Turn the PTT lock function ON and OFF.
To prevent accidental transmissions, this function disables [PTT].
Quick SPLIT
(Default: OFF)
Function > SPLIT/DUP > SPLIT LOCK (SPLIT LOCK)
Function > Time-Out Timer (Time-Out Timer)
PTT Lock
(Default: 0.000 MHz)
• The frequency offset can be set to between 0.0000 MHz
and 9.9999 MHz.
The default value may differ, depending on the selected frequency band and transceiver version.
(Default: ON)
Function > SPLIT/DUP > Quick SPLIT (Quick SPLIT)
NOTE:
• The shift direction can be set with [DUP] on M1 (M1
Menu) screen.
• You can use this setting only when the Split function
is OFF.
• If the DR mode is selected before selecting this
item, editing is restricted.
Turn the Quick Split function ON or OFF.
When this item is set to ON, hold down [SPLIT] for 1
second to shift the transmit frequency from the receive
frequency, according to the “SPLIT Offset” option as
described below. See page ??-?? for details.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Holding down [SPLIT] for 1 second quickly selects split frequency operation.
One Touch Repeater
(Default: DUP–)
Function > SPLIT/DUP > One Touch Repeater (One
Touch Repeater)
Set the one touch repeater shift direction.
• DUP–: The transmit frequency shifts down from the
receive frequency by the offset amount.
• DUP+: The transmit frequency shifts up from the receive frequency by the offset amount.
17-19
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Function Set mode (Continued)
Auto Repeater
[TUNER] Switch
Function > SPLIT/DUP > Auto Repeater (Auto Repeater)
This item appears only in the Korean and U.S.A. version transceivers.
Function > Tuner > [TUNER] Switch ([TUNER] Switch)
Select whether or not to store the AT-180’s status on
each band.
When you change the operating frequency, this function will automatically select the correct AT-180’s status,
or you must do it manually.
• Manual: You must manually change the AT-180’s status by pushing [TUNER].
• Auto: The AT-180’s status memorized by the band
memory is automatically selected. You can
also manually change it by pushing [TUNER].
The auto repeater function automatically turns the duplex operation and tone encoder* ON or OFF.
The offset and repeater tone* are not changed by the
auto repeater function. Reset these setting values, if
necessary.
For Korean versions
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Turns ON the duplex operation and tone encoder*. (Default)
[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch (Default: SPEECH/LOCK)
For U.S.A. version
• OFF:
Turns the function OFF.
• ON (DUP):
Turns ON the duplex operation
only. (Default)
• ON (DUP, TONE): Turns ON the duplex operation and
tone encoder*.
Function > [SPEECH/LOCK] Switch ([SPEECH/LOCK]
Switch)
switch action.
Select the SPEECH
turns ON the
• SPEECH/LOCK: Pushing SPEECH
voice synthesizer function.
Holding down SPEECH
turns the
dial lock function ON or OFF.
turns the dial lock
• LOCK/SPEECH: Pushing SPEECH
function ON or OFF.
turns ON
Holding down SPEECH
the voice synthesizer function.
*The tone encoder will not be turned ON in the DV mode.
Auto Start
(Default: OFF)
Function > Tuner > Auto Start (Tuner (Auto Start))
Turn the Automatic Antenna Tuner function ON or OFF
for an external antenna tuner (like the optional AT-180).
This function is for only the HF bands.
• OFF: Tuning starts only when TUNER/CALL is pushed.
• ON: The external antenna tuner automatically starts
tuning when the SWR is high, even if the tuner
is turned OFF.
PTT Start
(Default: Auto)
Lock Function
(Default: MAIN DIAL)
Function > Lock Function (Lock Function)
The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by
accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock function electronically locks the dial.
• MAIN DIAL: When Lock Function is activated, the
Dial is disabled.
• PANEL:
When Lock Function is activated, the
panel is disabled.
Functions except for [AF], [RF/SQL],
[PWR], [SPEECH/LOCK] are inhibited.
(Default: OFF)
Function > Tuner > PTT Start (Tuner (PTT Start))
When [PTT] is pushed after the operating frequency is
changed more than 1% from the last tuned frequency,
the external antenna tuner (optional AH-4 or AT-180)
automatically starts tuning.
• OFF: Tuning starts only when TUNER/CALL is pushed.
• ON : (AH-4) Automatically starts tuning when [PTT] is
pushed on a new frequency, whether the
external antenna tuner is ON or OFF
(AT-180) Automatically starts tuning when [PTT]
is pushed on a new frequency, only if
the internal antenna tuner is ON
Memopad Numbers
(Default: 5)
Function > Memopad Numbers (Memopad Numbers)
Set the number of usable memopad channels to either
5 or 10.
See page ??-?? for details.
17-20
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Function Set mode (Continued)
MAIN DIAL Auto TS
SSB/CW Sync Tuning
(Default: HIGH)
Function > MAIN DIAL Auto TS (MAIN DIAL Auto TS)
Function > SSB/CW Sync Tuning (SSB/CW Sync Tuning)
Set the Auto Tuning Step function for the Dial.
When rapidly rotating the Dial, the tuning step automatically changes as selected.
There are two types of auto tuning steps: LOW (Faster)
and HIGH (Fastest).
• OFF: Auto tuning step is turned OFF.
• LOW: Approximately 2 times faster.
• HIGH: Approximately 5 times faster when the tuning
step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps; approximately 2 times faster when the tuning step is
set to 5 kHz or larger steps.
MIC Up/Down Speed
(Default: OFF)
Turn the displayed frequency shift function ON or OFF.
When this function is turned ON, the audio pitch or
tones of the received signal will remain the same, even
when the operating mode is changed between SSB
and CW.
The amount of frequency shift may differ, depending on
the CW pitch setting.
• OFF: The displayed frequency does not shift.
• ON: The displayed frequency shifts when the operating mode is changed between SSB and CW.
CW Normal Side
(Default: Fast)
Function > MIC Up/Down Speed (MIC Up/Down
Speed)
(Default: LSB)
Function > CW Normal Side (CW Normal Side)
Select the sideband used to receive CW in the CW normal mode between LSB and USB.
Set the rate at which frequencies are tuned while holding down the microphone [∫]/[√] switches.
• Slow: Low speed (25 tuning steps/second)
• Fast: High speed (50 tuning steps/second)
VOICE 1st Menu
(Default: VOICE-TX)
Function > VOICE 1st Menu (VOICE 1st Menu)
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB)
Select VOICE-Root or VOICE-TX as the menu that appears ﬁrst after touching [VOICE] in the “M2” screen
(Menu 2), when the SSV, AM, FM or DV mode is selected.
• VOICE-Root: The voice menu appears ﬁrst.
• VOICE-TX: The voice SEND menu appears ﬁrst.
(Default: Auto/Manual)
Function > [NOTCH] Switch (SSB) ([NOTCH] Switch
(SSB))
Select the Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual notch ﬁlter to
be used for SSB mode operation.
• Auto:
Only the Auto notch ﬁlter can be used.
• Manual:
Only the Manual notch ﬁlter can be
used.
• Auto/Manual: Both the Auto and Manual notch ﬁlters
can be used.
[NOTCH] Switch (AM)
KEYER 1st Menu
(Default: KEYER-SEND)
Function > KEYER 1st Menu (KEYER 1st Menu)
Select KEYER-Root or KEYER-SEND as the menu
that appears ﬁrst after touching [KEYER] in the “M2”
screen (Menu 2), when in the CW mode.
• KEYER-Root: The Memory keyer menu appears
ﬁrst.
• KEYER-SEND: The Keyer SEND menu appears ﬁrst.
(Default: Auto/Manual)
Function > [NOTCH] Switch (AM) ([NOTCH] Switch
(AM))
Select the Auto, Manual or Auto/Manual notch ﬁlter to
be used for AM mode operation.
• Auto:
Only the Auto notch ﬁlter can be used.
• Manual:
Only the Manual notch ﬁlter can be
used.
• Auto/Manual: Both the Auto and Manual notch ﬁlters
can be used.
Speaker Out
(Default: ON)
Function > Speaker Out (Speaker Out)
Select the speaker output function.
• OFF: The speaker does not output the received audio.
The [ACC] socket, [USB] port, and [MIC] connector output the received audio.
• ON: The speaker outputs the received audio.
17-21
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Function Set mode (Continued)
MIC AF Out
Power OFF (With No Controller) (Default: ON)
(Default: OFF)
Function > Power OFF (With No Controller) (Power
OFF (With No Controller))
Function > MIC AF Out (MIC AF Out)
Select the [MIC] connector output function.
• OFF: The [MIC] connector does not output the received audio.
When using the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC, select “OFF.”
• ON: The [MIC] connector outputs the received audio.
When using a speaker microphone or headset,
select “OFF.”
[F-1]
Select to automatically turn OFF the transceiver when
the controller is disconnected from the transceiver.
• OFF: The transceiver power is ON.
• ON: The transceiver is automatically turned OFF.
REF Adjust
Function > REF Adjust (REF Adjust)
During frequency calibration, set the internal reference
frequency to between 0% and 100% range.
(Default: SPLIT)
Function > RC MIC > [F-1] ([F-1])
NOTE:
The default setting is different for each transceiver.
The function listed below can be assigned to [F-1] on
the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.
• --(No function), P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,
RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD, M-CLR, BANK,
SPLIT, A/B, DUP, TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,
DR, FROM/TO (DR), SCAN, Voice TX (T1)
[F-2]
(Default: A/B)
Function > RC MIC > [F-2] ([F-2])
The function listed below can be assigned to [F-2] on
the optional HM-151 REMOTE CONTROL MIC.
• --(No function), P.AMP/ATT, AGC, NB, NR, NOTCH,
RIT, AUTOTUNE/RX>CS, TS, MPAD, M-CLR, BANK,
SPLIT, A/B, DUP, TONE/DSQL, COMP, TBW, METER,
DR, FROM/TO (DR), SCAN, Voice TX (T1)
Mode Select
(Default: All mode)
Function > RC MIC > Mode Select (Mode Select)
Disables the mode selection with the optional HM-151
to simplify operation.
• SSB, CW, RTTY, AM, FM, WFM, DV
REMOTE CONTROL MIC,
17-22
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Tone Control Set mode
RX HPF/LPF
TBW (WIDE)
(Default: [----] - ----)
(Default: 100 - 2900)
Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX HPF/LPF (RX HPF/
LPF)
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM/DV)
Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (WIDE) (TBW
(WIDE))
(Mode: SSB)
First select the operating mode, then set the receive
audio high-pass ﬁlter to between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz
in 100 Hz steps.
Set the lower and higher cut-off frequencies of the
transmission passband width for your wide setting.
• Lower: 100, 200, 300 or 500 Hz
• Higher: 2500, 2700, 2800 or 2900 Hz
RX HPF/LPF
(Default: ---- - [----])
TBW (MID)
Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX HPF/LPF (RX HPF/
LPF)
(Mode: SSB/CW/RTTY/AM/FM/DV)
Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (MID) (TBW (MID))
(Mode: SSB)
Set the lower and higher cut-off frequencies of the
transmission passband width for your middle setting.
• Lower: 100, 200, 300 or 500 Hz
• Higher: 2500, 2700, 2800 or 2900 Hz
First select the operating mode, then set the receive
audio low-pass ﬁlter to between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz
in 100 Hz steps.
RX Bass
(Default: 0)
TBW (NAR)
Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX Bass (RX Bass)
(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/WFM/DV)
Set the lower and higher cut-off frequencies of the
transmission passband width for your narrow setting.
• Lower: 100, 200, 300 or 500 Hz
• Higher: 2500, 2700, 2800 or 2900 Hz
(Default: 0)
Tone Control > RX > (Mode) > RX Treble (RX Treble)
(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/WFM/DV)
First select the operating mode, then set the receive
audio treble level to between –5 and +5.
TX Bass
(Default: 0)
Tone Control > TX > (Mode) > TX Bass (TX Bass)
(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/DV)
First select the operating mode, then set the transmit
audio bass level to between –5 and +5.
TX Treble
(Default: 500 - 2500)
Tone Control > TX > SSB > TBW (NAR) (TBW (NAR))
(Mode: SSB)
First select the operating mode, then set the receive
audio bass level to between –5 and +5.
RX Treble
(Default: 300 - 2700)
(Default: 0)
Tone Control > TX > (Mode) > TX Treble (TX Treble)
(Mode: SSB/AM/FM/DV)
First select the operating mode, then set the transmit
audio treble level to between –5 and +5.
17-23
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Connectors Set mode
USB Audio SQL
DATA MOD Level
(Default: OFF (OPEN))
(Default: 50%)
Connectors > USB Audio SQL (USB Audio SQL)
Connectors > DATA MOD Level (DATA MOD Level)
Select whether or not to output the audio from the
[USB] connector on the rear panel, according to the
squelch state.
The same audio signals are output from the [USB] connector and the [ACC] socket.
• OFF (OPEN): The received audio is output regardless of the squelch state.
• ON:
The received audio is output depending
on the squelch state (open or closed).
Set the input modulation level at the [DATA] jack to between 0% and 100%.
USB MOD Level
Connectors > USB MOD Level (USB MOD Level)
Set the input modulation level of the [USB] connector to
between 0% and 100%.
• The beep tones and the voice synthesizer announcements are not sent.
• The received audio output level cannot be adjusted
with the [AF] control.
ACC/USB Output Select
DATA OFF MOD
Select the desired connector(s) for data modulation input in the data OFF mode.
• MIC:
Use the signals from [MIC].
• ACC:
Use the signals from [ACC] (pin 11).
• MIC, ACC: Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC] (pin
11).
• USB:
Use the signals from [USB].
(Default: AF)
Select whether to use the [USB] connector and the
[ACC] socket for a usual received audio, or to use the
IF output for [DRM (Digital Radio Mondiale)].
• AF: The received audio is output from the [ACC] socket and the [USB] connector.
• IF: The received signal is converted to an IF signal,
and then output.
DATA MOD
Select the desired connector(s) for data modulation input in the data mode.
• MIC:
Use the signals from [MIC].
• ACC:
Use the signals from [ACC] (pin 11).
• MIC, ACC: Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC] (pin
11).
• USB:
Use the signals from [USB].
(Default: 50%)
Enter the audio output level at the [ACC] socket and the
[USB] connector to between 0% and 100%.
VOICE
(Default: OFF)
Connectors > External Keypad > VOICE (External Keypad (VOICE))
(Default: 50%)
Connectors > ACC/USB IF Level (ACC/USB IF Level)
Select whether or not to enable transmitting voice
memory contents using the external keypad.
• OFF: The external keypad is disabled.
• ON: Transmits the desired voice memory contents in
T1 to T4 during SSB, AM, FM, DV operation.
Set the IF output level at the [ACC] socket and the
[USB] connector to between 0% and 100%.
ACC MOD Level
(Default: ACC)
Connectors > DATA MOD (DATA MOD)
Connectors > ACC/USB AF Level (ACC/USB AF Level)
ACC/USB IF Level
(Default: MIC, ACC)
Connectors > DATA OFF MOD (DATA OFF MOD)
Connectors > ACC/USB Output Select (ACC/USB Output Select)
ACC/USB AF Level
(Default: 50%)
(Default: 50%)
Connectors > ACC MOD Level (ACC MOD Level)
Set the input modulation level at the [ACC] socket to
between 0% and 100%.
17-24
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Connectors Set mode (Continued)
KEYER
USB2 Function
(Default: OFF)
(Default: OFF)
Connectors > External Keypad > KEYER (External
Keypad (KEYER))
Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > USB2 Function
(USB2 Function)
Select whether or not to enable transmitting keyer
memory contents using the external keypad.
• OFF: The external keypad is disabled.
• ON: Transmits the desired keyer memory contents in
M1 to M4 during CW mode operation.
Two COM port numbers are assigned to the [USB] connector. One of them is used for cloning and CI-V operation (USB1).
Select the use of the other COM port (USB2).
RTTY
• OFF:
• RTTY:
Does not use the COM port (USB2).
Decode used for RTTY decoded signal output.
• DV Data: Used for low-speed data input and output.
(Default: OFF)
Connectors > External Keypad > RTTY (External Keypad (RTTY))
• If DATA1 Function is set to “GPS,” and GPS Out
is set to “DATA1USB2,” the COM port (USB2)
will be used for low-speed data input and GPS
data output.
Select whether or not to enable transmitting RTTY
memory contents using the external keypad.
• OFF: The external keypad is disabled.
• ON: Transmits the desired RTTY memory contents
in RT1 to RT4 during RTTY mode operation.
CI-V Baud Rate
DATA1 Function
Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > DATA1 Function
(DATA1 Function)
(Default: Auto)
Select the use of the [DATA1] jack.
Connectors > CI-V > CI-V Baud Rate (CI-V Baud
Rate)
• OFF:
• RTTY:
Does not use the [DATA1] jack.
Decode used for RTTY decoded signal output.
• DV Data: Used for low-speed data input and output.
• GPS:
Used for the GPS receiver connection for
position data input.
Set the CI-V data transfer speed to 300, 1200, 4800,
9600, 19200 bps or Auto.
When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automatically
set according to the data rate of the controller.
CI-V Address
(Default: 88h)
NOTE:
You cannot set “DV Data” to both “USB2 Function”
and “DATA1 Function.”
If you select “DV Data” for one of them when “DV
Data” is set to the other one, the previously set item
will be to “OFF.”
Connectors > CI-V > CI-V Address (CI-V Address)
To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has its
own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code.
The IC-7100’s default address is 88h.
When 2 or more IC-7100s are controlled through a PC
at the same time, set a different address for each device between 01h and DFh (hexadecimal).
CI-V Transceive
(Default: GPS)
GPS Out
(Default: OFF)
Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > GPS Out (GPS
Out)
(Default: ON)
Connectors > CI-V > CI-V Transceive (CI-V Transceive)
Select whether or not to output the data to the COM
port (USB2) when data is input from a GPS receiver
through the [DATA1] jack.
Turn the CI-V Transceive function ON or OFF.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: When you change a setting on the transceiver,
the same change is automatically set on other
connected transceivers or receivers, and vice
versa.
NOTE:
You can use this function only when “OFF” or “DV
Data” is selected as the “USB2 Function” option, and
“GPS” is selected as the “DATA1 Function” option.
• OFF:
Turns OFF the function.
• DATA1USB2: Outputs the GPS data to the COM
port (USB2).
17-25
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Connectors Set mode (Continued)
DV Data/GPS Out Baud
(Default: 4800)
Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > DV Data/GPS
Out Baud (DV Data/GPS Out Baud)
Set the DV or GPS data transfer speed to 4800 or 9600
bps.
RTTY Decode Baud
(Default: 9600)
Connectors > USB2/DATA1 Function > RTTY Decode
Baud (RTTY Decode Baud)
Set the RTTY decode monitor speed to 300, 1200,
4800, 9600 or 19200 bps.
VSEND Select
(Default: VHF/UHF)
Connectors > VSEND Select (VSEND Select)
Select the band to use for the [ACC] socket’s pin 7
(VSEND usage) and pin 3 (HSEND usage).
• OFF:
VSEND is not used.
HSEND is used for all bands.
• UHF:
VSEND is used for the 430 MHz band.
HSEND is used for the HF/50 MHz and
144 MHz bands.
• VHF/UHF: VSEND is used for the 144 MHz and 430
MHz bands.
HSEND is used for the HF/50 MHz
bands.
9600bps Mode
(Default: OFF)
Connectors > 9600bps Mode (9600bps Mode)
Select whether to allow data transmission at 9600 bps,
or not on the [DATA2] socket.
• OFF: Disables data transmission at 9600 bps on the
[DATA2] socket. This is used for regular audio or
slower data transmission only.
• ON: Enables data transmission at 9600 bps on the
[DATA2] socket.
17-26
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Display Set mode
Display Contrast
RX Call Sign Display
(Default: 25%)
(Default: Auto)
Display > LCD Contrast (LCD Contrast)
Display > RX Call Sign Display (RX Call Sign Display)
Set the display contrast level to between 0% and
100%.
Select whether or not to display the call sign of the caller station when a call is received.
• OFF:
Does not display the caller station’s
call sign.
• Auto:
The caller station’s call sign automatically scrolls once, and then disappears.
• Auto (RX Hold): The caller station’s call sign automatically scrolls once, and then remains
on the display until the signal disappears.
LCD Backlight
(Default: 50%)
Display > LCD Backlight (LCD Backlight)
Set the LCD backlight brightness to between 0% and
100%.
Key Backlight
(Default: 50%)
NOTE:
When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected, and if
the call sign and name of the caller station is programmed in your memory, the programmed name is
displayed after showing the call sign.
Display > Key Backlight (Key Backlight)
Set the key backlight brightness to between 0% and
100%.
Meter Peak Hold
(Default: ON)
Display > Meter Peak Hold (Meter Peak Hold)
RX Message Display
Turn the Meter Peak Hold function ON or OFF.
This function displays the peak level of a received signal strength or the output power for approximately 0.5
seconds.
Display > RX Message Display (RX Message Display)
BW Popup (PBT)
Select whether or not to display and scroll a received
message.
• OFF: Does not display the message.
To check the message, touch [CD] on the “D-1”
screen (Menu D1) to display the call record.
• Auto: Automatically displays and scrolls the message.
The message is automatically displayed every
30 seconds until their signal disappears.
(Default: ON)
Display > BW Popup (PBT) (BW Popup (PBT))
Select whether or not to display the PBT shift value
while rotating the TWIN-PBT control.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Displays the PBT shift value.
BW Popup (FIL)
(Default: Auto)
NOTE:
When “Auto” or “Auto (RX Hold)” is selected in RX
Call Sign Display, the message is displayed after displaying the caller station’s call sign.
(Default: ON)
Display > BW Popup (FIL) (BW Popup (FIL))
Reply Position Display
Select whether or not to display the IF ﬁlter width and
shift value when the IF ﬁlter is switched by touching the
ﬁlter icon.
• OFF: Turns the function OFF.
• ON: Displays the IF ﬁlter width and shift value.
(Default: ON)
Display > Reply Position Display (Reply Position Display)
Select whether or not to display the caller’s position
data when the data is included in the Auto Replay signal.
• OFF: Does not display the caller’s position data.
• ON: Automatically displays the caller’s position data.
17-27
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Display Set mode (Continued)
TX Call Sign Display (Default: Your Call Sign)
Power ON Check
Display > TX Call Sign Display (TX Call Sign Display)
Display > Power ON Check (Power ON Check)
Select whether or not to display your own or the destination station’s call sign while transmitting.
• OFF:
Does not display the call sign.
• Your Call Sign: Displays and scrolls the destination’s
call sign.
When the called station’s call sign and
name are programmed into memory,
the transceiver shows the name after
the call sign in any DV mode except
for the DR mode.
• My Call Sign: Displays and scrolls your own call
sign.
Select whether or not to display the RF Power, RIT,
Auto Power OFF condition when the transceiver is activated.
When the RIT or Auto Power OFF is set to OFF, no
display is shown.
• OFF: Does not display the RF Power, RIT, Auto Power
OFF condition.
• ON: Displays the RF Power, RIT, Auto Power OFF
condition.
Display Language
(Default: ON)
(Default: English)
Display > Display Language (Display Language)
Scroll Speed
This item will appear only when “Japanese” is selected in System Language. See page ??-??
“Choose your language carefully” about setting
cautions.
(Default: Fast)
Display > Scroll Speed (Scroll Speed)
This item sets the scrolling speed of the message, call
sign, or other text, that is displayed on the transceiver's
LCD.
• Slow: The speed is set to slow.
• Fast: The speed is set to fast.
Set the screen display language type in the DR mode
or Menu mode to English or Japanese.
System Language
VOICE TX Name Display
(Default: ON)
Display > System Language (System Language)
Display > VOICE TX Name Display (VOICE TX Name
Display)
Set the system language of the transceiver to English
or Japanese.
• English: The system language of the transceiver is
English.
- Only alphabetical characters (A to Z, a to
z, 0 to 9) and symbols (! " # $ % & ' ( ) * +
, - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~) can be
displayed.
If Japanese characters (Kanji, Hiragana
and Katakana) are included, the LCD
shows “=” or “_” instead of that character.
In this case, you can only delete “=” or “_”
in the transceiver's edit mode.
- The Display Language item will be hidden.
• Japanese: The system language of the transceiver is
Japanese.
Kanji, Hiragana and Katakana characters,
and the 2-bytes symbols can be displayed
on the LCD.
To display such characters in the DR mode
or Menu mode, Display Language must be
set to “Japanese.”
Select whether or not to display the voice TX memory
name on the “Voice TX” display.
• OFF: Does not display the voice TX memory name.
• ON: Displays voice TX memory name.
KEYER Memory Display
(Default: ON)
Display > KEYER Memory Display (KEYER Memory
Display)
Select whether or not to display the keyer memory contents on the “Keyer Send” display.
• OFF: Does not display the keyer memory contents.
• OFF: Displays keyer memory contents.
Opening Message
(Default: English)
(Default: ON)
Display > Opening Message (Opening Message)
Select the opening message that is displayed on the
LCD at power ON.
• OFF: Opening message display is skipped.
• ON: Icom logo, MY call sign and the product model
(“IC-7100”)* are displayed at power ON.
*Depending on the version.
17-28
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Display Set mode (Continued)
Choose your language carefully
When the system language of the transceiver is set to Japanese, the IC7100 has the capability to display both English and Japanese characters.
HOWEVER, if you select Japanese as the display language (p. ??-??), all
menu items throughout the IC-7100 system will be displayed in only Japanese characters. There will be no English item names. Unless you are ﬂuent
in reading Japanese characters, use this feature with extreme caution.
If you change the IC-7100’s language to Japanese, and can’t understand
the menu system in the new setting, you will have to change the language
back to English in “Display Language” or “System Language” (this item),
or by doing a partial reset of the IC-7100 CPU. A partial reset will not clear
your call sign databases.
To do a partial reset of the CPU, do the following steps:
1. Push SET .
2. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the bottom item, and then touch it.
3. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the bottom item, and then touch it.
4. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the upper item, and then touch it.
5. The dialog appears. Touch [∫] or [√] to select the upper option, and then
push touch it.
- The transceiver displays “PARTIAL RESET,” then the partial reset is
completed.
17-29
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Time Set Set mode
DATE
Auto Power OFF
Time Set > Date/Time > DATE (DATE)
Time Set > Auto Power OFF (Auto Power OFF)
Manually set the date to between 2000/01/01 and
2099/12/31.
This function automatically turns OFF the power after
no operation has not been performed for the preprogrammed time.
The “Auto Power OFF” pops up in 10 seconds before
the transceiver automatically turns OFF, and a beep
sounds. If an operation is made within the 10 seconds,
the timer restarts.
TIME
Time Set > Date/Time > TIME (TIME)
Manually set the time that is displayed on the right hand
corner of the screen to between 0:00 and 23:59.
The time is displayed in the 24 hour format.
GPS Time correct
• OFF:
Turns the function OFF.
• 30 to 120 min: Select the desired Auto Power OFF
time between 30, 60, 90 and 120 minutes. The power automatically turns
OFF after no operation is made for the
specified time period.
(Default: Auto)
Time Set > GPS Time Correct (GPS Time Correct)
Select whether or not the time data is automatically
corrected by a received GPS sentence.
• OFF: The time data is not automatically corrected.
• Auto: The time data is automatically corrected.
UTC Offset
NOTE:
The auto power OFF timer activates each time the
transceiver is turned ON. To deactivate the timer, select OFF.
(Default: ±9:00)
Time Set > UTC Offset (UTC Offset)
Set the time difference between UTC (Universal Time
Coordinated) and the local time to between –14:00 and
+14:00 in 00:05 steps.
Clock Display
(Default: OFF)
(Default: Local)
Time Set > Clock Display (Clock Display)
Set the clock display mode.
• Local: Displays the local time.
• UTC: Displays the UTC (Universal Time Coordinated).
17-30
Previous view
17
SET MODE
Others Set mode
Version
All Reset
Others > Information > Version (VERSION)
Others > Reset > All Reset
Shows the transceiver ﬁrmware’s version number.
Reset the CPU, if the internal CPU malfunctions due to
static electricity, and so on. All reset clears all programming and returns all settings to their factory defaults
(including the programmed data you purchased).
Therefore, after the All resetting, you cannot use the
transceiver in the DR mode until reprogramming the
repeater list.
See page ??-?? for details.
Clone Mode
Others > Clone > Clone Mode
Select to read or write the CS-7100 data from or to the
PC, and/or to receive data from a Master transceiver.
See page ??-?? for details.
✓ Recommend!
Before the All resetting, we recommend you save the
programmed data you purchased onto an SD card.
See page ??-?? for details.
Clone Master Mode
Others > Clone > Clone Master Mode
Select to write your IC-7100 (Master) data to another
IC-7100 (Sub).
See page ??-?? for details.
Touch Screen Calibration
Others > Touch Screen Calibration
Touch to adjust the touch screen.
See page ??-?? for details.
Partial Reset
Others > Reset > Partial Reset
A Partial reset resets operating settings to their default
values (VFO frequency, VFO settings, menu contents)
without clearing the items below:
See page ??-?? for details.
17-31

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : masaakit
Create Date                     : 2013:05:23 17:02:41-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:06:12 16:58:12-04:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Metadata Date                   : 2013:06:12 16:58:12-04:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : manual_draft_ALL.pdf
Creator                         : masaakit
Document ID                     : uuid:445f151e-fed1-4495-baa0-023a835cadff
Instance ID                     : uuid:4b6ef110-d8a8-4cea-b0ec-b17909fd5c8d
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 197

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

ICOM orporated 339300 HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver User Manual manual draft ALL

ICOM Incorporated HF/VHF/UHF All Mode Transceiver manual draft ALL

User Manual

FCC ID Filing: AFJ339300

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation